08 Programming ShopTurn

SINUMERIK 840D sl

ShopTurn

01/2008 Edition

Operation/Programming

Introduction 1

Setting up the machine 2

Machining the

workpiece 3

Creating a ShopTurn

program 4

ShopTurn functions 5

Working with manual

machine 6

G-code program 7

Working with a B axis 8

Working with two tool

holders 9

Tool management 10

Program management 11

Messages, alarms,

user data 12

Examples 13

Appendix A

Index B

Valid for

Control SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl

Software VersionNCU System Software for SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.5 with ShopTurn 7.5

SINUMERIK® Documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" column. Status code in the "Remarks" column: A .... New documentation. B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number. C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order No. Comment 03/2001 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0 A 01/2002 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP1 C 06/2003 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2 C 08/2005 6FC5 398-5AP10-0BA0 C 11/2006 6FC5 398-5AP10-1BA0 C 01/2008 6FC5 398-5AP10-2BA0 C Registered trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining designations found in this publication could be trademarks whose use by a third party for its own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Additional information is available on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol © Siemens AG 2008

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. Suggestions for improvement are welcome. Technical data subject to change.

6FC5398-5AP10 - 2BA0 Siemens AG

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

0 01/2008 Preface

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 iii

Preface SINUMERIK®

Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: • General documentation • User documentation • Manufacturer/service documentation

An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly basis and provides information about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select the menu items "Support" "Technical Documentation" "Publications Overview.”

The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found at the following website: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support"

Target group This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide lathes with SINUMERIK 840D sl.

Benefits This document familiarizes you with the operating elements and commands. Based on the manual, you are capable of responding to problems and to take corrective action.

Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version of ShopTurn. Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.

Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance.


http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb


0 Preface 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. iv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Technical Support If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline: Europe/Africa Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request

America Phone: +1 (0) 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2200 E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Asia/Pacific Phone: +86 (0) 1064 719 990 Fax: +86 (0) 1064 747 474 E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Technology hotline Phone: +49 (0) 2166 5506-115 The hotline is available on weekdays between 8:00 and 17:00

National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet address: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions on the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-63315 E-mail: mailto:[email protected] For the fax form, see the response sheet at the end of the document.

SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request

mailto:[email protected]


http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support


http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

0 01/2008 Preface

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 v

Safety information This manual contains information that must be observed to ensure your personal safety and to prevent property damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only, have no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level, warnings are indicated in a descending order as follows:

Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution indicates that slight personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice indicates that an undesirable result or condition can occur if the corresponding information is not observed.

In the event of a number of levels of danger prevailing simultaneously, the warning corresponding to the highest level of danger is always used. If a warning notice is used with the safety alert symbol to warn against injury, this same notice may also include a warning regarding property damage.

Qualified personnel The associated device/system must only be set up and operated using this documentation. A device/system must only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the safety information in this documentation, a "qualified person" is someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.

0 Preface 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. vi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Correct usage Please note the following:

Warning The equipment may only be used for single purpose applications explicitly described in the catalog and in the technical description and it may only be used along with third-party devices and components approved by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product required proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly, as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Structure of the documentation

The following information blocks, marked by pictograms, are used in this documentation:

Orientation

Background information

Operating sequence

Explanation of the parameters

Additional notes

Software option The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the appropriate option.

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine manufacturer:

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is indicated as follows:

References:

Terminology The meanings of some basic terms are given below in this documentation.

Program A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific workpiece on the machine.

0 01/2008 Preface

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 vii

Contour The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.

Cycle A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subroutine specified by ShopTurn for carrying out a recurring machining process. (A cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function.)

Spindles/axes The various spindles/axes are designated in this documentation as follows: S1: Main spindle S2: Tool spindle S3: Counter spindle C1: C-axis main spindle C3: C-axis counter spindle Z3: Special axis (e.g. axis to move the counter spindle)

Other designations may have been assigned by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The

equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.

Metric Inch mm in mm/tooth in/tooth mm/min in/min mm/rev in/rev m/min ft/min

0 Preface 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. viii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Notes

0 01/2008 Contents 0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 ix

Contents Introduction 1-17

1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18 1.1.1 Work sequence ......................................................................................................... 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system.................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-25 1.2.5 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-29 1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36 1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40 1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44

Setting up the machine 2-45

2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46 2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48

2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50 2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)................................ 2-50 2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51 2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57 2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually ........................................................................................ 2-63 2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67 2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass................................................................. 2-69

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70

2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71 2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72 2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74 2.7.3 Zero offset list ........................................................................................................... 2-75

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle...................................................................................... 2-77

0 Contents 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. x SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

2.8.2 Traversing axes.........................................................................................................2-79 2.8.3 Positioning axes ........................................................................................................2-81 2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece...........................................................................2-81 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode .........................................................................................2-84

2.9 MDA ..........................................................................................................................2-86

2.10 Run times ..................................................................................................................2-87

Machining the workpiece 3-89

3.1 Starting/stopping machining......................................................................................3-90

3.2 Running in a program................................................................................................3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block .......................................................................3-94

3.4 Repositioning axes....................................................................................................3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point ..........................................................3-96

3.6 Controlling the program sequence..........................................................................3-101

3.7 Overstoring..............................................................................................................3-103

3.8 Testing a program ...................................................................................................3-104

3.9 Correcting a program ..............................................................................................3-105

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .......................................................................3-106

3.11 Simulating machining ..............................................................................................3-107 3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece ..........................................................3-109 3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece .....................................3-110 3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................3-111 3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program......................................................3-112 3.11.5 Different workpiece views .......................................................................................3-113 3.11.6 Changing the cutout ................................................................................................3-117

3.12 Settings for automatic mode ...................................................................................3-119 3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate.....................................................................................3-119 3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter....................................................................3-120

Creating a ShopTurn program 4-121

4.1 Program structure ...................................................................................................4-122

4.2 Fundamentals..........................................................................................................4-124 4.2.1 Machining planes ....................................................................................................4-124 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ...............................................................4-126 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions ....................................................................4-128 4.2.4 Polar coordinates ....................................................................................................4-130 4.2.5 Pocket calculator .....................................................................................................4-131 4.2.6 Adjustments.............................................................................................................4-133

4.3 Sequence program..................................................................................................4-134 4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................4-134 4.3.2 Creating a new program..........................................................................................4-136


© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xi

4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140 4.3.4 Changing program blocks....................................................................................... 4-144 4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145 4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148

ShopTurn functions 5-149

5.1 Straight or circular path movements ....................................................................... 5-151 5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane..................................................................... 5-152 5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-159 5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160 5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162

5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163 5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-164 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-167 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171 5.2.6 Thread milling ......................................................................................................... 5-173 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-175 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions .............................................................................. 5-176 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179 5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182 5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-184 5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern..................................................................................... 5-186 5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-188 5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196 5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-199 5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203 5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206 5.4.1 Representation of the contour ................................................................................ 5-208 5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210 5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218 5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224

0 Contents 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. xii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

5.4.8 Grooving residual material ......................................................................................5-226 5.4.9 Plunge-turning.........................................................................................................5-227 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material .............................................................................5-229

5.5 Milling ......................................................................................................................5-231 5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-232 5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-236 5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-240 5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-244 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-247 5.5.6 Circumferential slot .................................................................................................5-250 5.5.7 Open slot .................................................................................................................5-253 5.5.8 Positions..................................................................................................................5-259 5.5.9 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-259 5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-261

5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-268 5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-271 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-273 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-275 5.6.4 Changing a contour.................................................................................................5-282 5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-284 5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-289 5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing).........................................................................5-293 5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket ................................................5-296 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-298 5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-302 5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)..........................................................................5-303 5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot .................................................5-306 5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot .......................................................................................5-308 5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-311

5.7 Calling a subroutine ................................................................................................5-313

5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-315

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle..........................................................................5-316

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-322

5.11 Calling zero offsets..................................................................................................5-323

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-324

5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ...........................................................5-326

5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-328

5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330 5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-330 5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern.....................................................................................5-331 5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-332


© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xiii

Working with manual machine 6-333

6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334

6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode ....................................................... 6-335 6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336 6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337 6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338

6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-339 6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine .................................................................................. 6-340 6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine................................................................................. 6-340 6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine................................................................................... 6-341

6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342

G code program 7-343

7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-344

7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-347

7.3 G code editor .......................................................................................................... 7-349

7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352

Working with a B axis 8-353

8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-354

8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356

8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356 8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-357 8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358

8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-360

8.5 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 8-361

8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362

Working with two tool holders 9-363

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ......................................................................... 9-364

9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364

9.3 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 9-365

Tool management 10-367

10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine............................................................. 10-368

10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374 10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374 10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool ....................................................... 10-376 10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-377

0 Contents 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. xiv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

10.3 Sorting tools ..........................................................................................................10-378

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ..............................................................................10-378

10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ...............................................10-379

10.6 Relocating a tool....................................................................................................10-381

10.7 Positioning a magazine .........................................................................................10-383

10.8 Entering tool wear data .........................................................................................10-383

10.9 Activating tool monitoring ......................................................................................10-384

10.10 Managing magazine locations ..............................................................................10-386

Program management 11-387

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn......................................................................11-388

11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................11-389 11.2.1 Opening a program ...............................................................................................11-391 11.2.2 Executing a program .............................................................................................11-392 11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive .........................................11-393 11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-394 11.2.5 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-395 11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program.................................................................11-396 11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-397 11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-398

11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)...........................................11-401 11.3.1 Opening a program ...............................................................................................11-403 11.3.2 Executing a program .............................................................................................11-404 11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ...............................................................................11-405 11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........11-406 11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-408 11.3.6 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-409 11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program....................................................11-410 11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-412 11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data...................................................................11-412

Messages, alarms, user data 12-415

12.1 Messages ..............................................................................................................12-416

12.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................12-416

12.3 User data...............................................................................................................12-417

12.4 Version display......................................................................................................12-419

Examples 13-421

13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................13-422

13.2 Contour milling ......................................................................................................13-434


© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 xv

Appendix A-443

A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444

B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447

0 Contents 01/2008

0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. xvi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

1 01/2008 Introduction 1

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 1-17

Introduction 1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18

1.1.1 Work sequence ......................................................................................................... 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-23 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-25 1.2.5 Machine control panel elements ............................................................................... 1-25

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-29 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-29 1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys............................................................................... 1-32 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-36 1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-40 1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface ............................................................................................ 1-42 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-44

1 Introduction 01/2008 1.1 ShopTurn

1

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. 1-18 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

1.1 ShopTurn ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for

turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine and to program workpieces.

These are some of the features the software provides:

Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to measure the tools and the workpiece.

Executing a program You can display the program execution in 3-D on the screen. This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to observe the progress of workpiece machining at the machine (software option).

To execute a sequence program, you must have reading and writing rights.

The execution of sequence programs is a software option.

Creating a program Programming the workpiece with ShopTurn is effortless, since it is graphically supported and doesn't require knowledge of G-code. ShopTurn shows the program in a user-friendly work plan and displays the individual cycles and contour elements in dynamic graphics. The powerful contour computer allows any contour to be input. A stock removal cycle with residual material detection saves extra machining processes.

Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the data of tools that are not in the revolver.

Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.

Remote diagnostics You can switch from ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface. There, you can also activate a remote diagnostic which allows the machine to be operated via an external computer.

1 01/2008 Introduction1.1 ShopTurn

1


1.1.1 Work sequence

Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide. • You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically

machining a workpiece. • You want to create the program to be used for machining a

workpiece.

Executing a program Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. To do this, you must perform the following actions, during which you will be supported by ShopTurn (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"): • Approach the reference point of the machine

(only for incremental position measuring systems) • Tool measuring • Define the workpiece zero • Enter any other work offsets If you have completely set up the machine, you can select a program and automatically execute it (see Sec. "Machining a Workpiece").

Creating a program If you create a new program, you can select whether you would like to make a sequence program or a G-code program (see "Creating a Sequential Control Program" or "G-code Program"). When creating a sequence program, ShopTurn prompts you to input all relevant parameters. Programming progress is automatically indicated in a dashed-line diagram. Help screens that explain the parameters in each operation also support you with programming. You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a sequence program. A G code program, however, must be created entirely out of G code commands.

1 Introduction 01/2008 1.2 Workstation

1


1.2 Workstation In addition to the lathe with CNC/positioning control, a ShopTurn

workstation also has an operator panel and machine control panel.

Workstation configuration

Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide lathe with three axes, of a main spindle, of a tool spindle, and of a counter-spindle.

Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl) and PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced).

Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn is done via the operator panel.

Machine control panel You operate the lathe using the machine control panel.

Turning machine complete with control

Operator panel

Machinecontrol panel

1 01/2008 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1


1.2.1 Coordinate system

When machining a workpiece on a lathe, one basically uses a right-angled coordinate system. This consists of the three coordinate axes X, Y, and Z which are parallel to the machine axes. The coordinate axis Y does not have to be set up. Spindle axis Z is an independently rotating axis and is designated with the letter C.

The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend on the type of machine used.

WM X+

Z+

Y+

W = Workpiece zero

C

M = Machine zero

Position of the coordinate system, machine zero and workpiece zero (example)


1


1.2.2 Operator panels

You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:

OP 010 OP 010C OP 010S OP 012 OP 015 OP 015A OP 015AT TP 015A TP15AT

In this example, the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate the components that are available for operating the control and machine tool. The keys are described in the next section.

Operator panel OP 010

3

4

2

1

6

.

5

2

Operator panel OP 010

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface


1


1.2.3 Operator panel keys

Alarm Cancel Cancels the alarm that is marked with this symbol.

Channel Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Help Toggles between the process plan and programming graphics as well as between the parameterization screen form with programming graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.

Next Window Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Page Up or Page Down Page upward or downward in the directory or in the process plan.

Cursor Navigate between different fields or lines. Use Cursor right to open a directory or program. Use Cursor left to switch to the next highest level in the directory tree.

Select Chooses one of a number of options presented. This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey.

End Moves the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen form.

Backspace • Delete the value in the input field. • In insertion mode, it deletes the character after the cursor.

Tab Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Shift Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual input keys.


1


Ctrl Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan and in the G code editor: • Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning. • Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.

Old Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Del • Deletes the value in the parameter field. • In insertion mode, it deletes the character marked by the cursor. • Deletes the machining lines during parallel drawing and in the

simulation.

Insert Activates insertion mode or the pocket calculator.

Input • Terminates entry of a value in the input field. • Opens a directory or program.

Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Messages/Alarms" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey.

Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" softkey.

Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey

Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program Manager" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.


1


1.2.4 Machine control panels

The lathe can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens or with a specific machine control panel from the machine manufacturer.

You perform actions on the lathe via the machine control panel, for example, traversing axes or starting the machining of the workpiece. When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on the machine control panel light up.

1.2.5 Machine control panel elements

EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece. All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.

For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button, please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Reset

Reset • Interrupts execution of the current program.

The CNC control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run.

• Cancels an alarm

Jog

Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode.

Teach In

Teach In Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

MDA

MDA Selects MDA mode.

Auto

Auto Selects Machine Auto operating mode.


1


Single Block

Single Block Executes the program block by block (single block).

Repos

Repos Repositions, re-approaches the contour.

Ref Point

Ref. Point Approach reference point.

VAR

Inc Var (incremental feed variable) Incremental mode with variable increment size.

1

... 10000

Inc (Incremental feed) Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1, ..., 10,000 increments.

A machine data code defines how the increment value is interpreted. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start Starts execution of a program.

Cycle Stop

Cycle Stop Stops execution of a program.

+X ...

Z

Axis keys Traverse axis in corresponding direction.

Rapid

Rapid Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).

WCS MCS

WCS MCS Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work) and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).


1


%

Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override Raises or lowers the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse. The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse). The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.

Feed Stop

Feed Stop Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.

Feed Start

Feed Start Continues execution of the program in the current block and ramps up to the feedrate specified in the program.

%

Spindle override Increases or decreases the programmed spindle speed. The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.

Spindle Dec.

Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel Decreases the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Inc.

Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel Increases the programmed spindle speed.

100%

100% – only OP032S machine control panel Restores the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Stop

Spindle Stop Stop spindle.

Spindle Start

Spindle Start Start spindle.


1


Key-operated switch You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch

has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7. Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs, data, and functions at various protection levels.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove

in the specified positions:

Position 0 No key Level of protection 7 Position 1 Key 1 black Level of protection 6 Position 2 Key 1 green Level of protection 5 Position 3 Key 1 red Level of protection 4

Lowest access rights

⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓ Increasing

access authorization ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓

Highest access rights

When you change the key position to change the access authorization, this is immediately not visible on the operator interface. You have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open a directory).

If the PLC is in the Stop state (LED of the machine control panel is flashing), ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch positions during boot up.

The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a password. When the password is set, ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch position.

1 01/2008 Introduction1.3 User interface

1


1.3 User interface

1.3.1 Overview

Screen layout

User interface

1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode 2 Alarm and message line 3 Program name 4 Program path 5 Channel state and program control 6 Channel operational messages 7 Position display of the axes 8 Display for

• active tool T • current feedrate F • active spindle (S1 = main spindle, S2 = tool spindle,

S3 = counter spindle) • spindle utilization in percent

9 Display of active work offsets and rotation 10 Working window 11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text 12 Horizontal softkey bar 13 Vertical softkey bar 14 Softkeys 15 Screen buttons

1 Introduction 01/2008 1.3 User interface

1


Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point REPOS: Repositioning INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment INC_VAR: Variable increment

Channel status RESET

Active

Interrupted

Program control SKP: Skip G code block DRY: DRY run feedrate !ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override) SBL1: Single-block (stop after each block that has a function on the machine) SBL2: Selection not possible in ShopTurn (stop after each block) SBL3: Single-block fine (stop after each block, also within a cycle) M01: Programmed stop DRF: DRF offset PRT: Program test

Channel operational messages

Stop: An operator action is required.

Wait: No operator action is required. If a dwell time is active, the remaining dwell time is displayed. It is either displayed in seconds or as spindle revolutions.

Position display of the axes

The actual value display in the position display refers to the SZS coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed. Symbols for axis displays:

Linear axis clamped Rotary axis clamped

Feedrate status Feed is not enabled

Spindle status Spindle not enabled

Spindle is stationary

Spindle is turning clockwise

Spindle is turning counter-clockwise The display of the spindle utilization as a percentage can be 200%.



1


Key to the meaning of the symbol colors: Red: Machine is stationary Green: Machine is running Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action Gray: Miscellaneous

Screen buttons

Machine Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDA, or Machine Auto).

Return jump Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Extension Changes the horizontal softkey bar.

Menu Select Calls the main menu:

The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the

program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with the program name (3).



1


1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and keys

The ShopTurn operator interface consists of various screen forms in which there are eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys respectively. You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the softkey bars. Each softkey displays a new screen form.

ShopTurn has 3 modes (Manual Machine, MDA, and Machine Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program Messages/ Alarms, and Tools/Zero-point offsets).

To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed, in which you can select the appropriate operating area via a softkey.

Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hardkeys on the operator panel.

Jog MDA Auto

You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys on the machine control panel. If you select the "Machine" softkey in the main menu, the screen form for the currently active mode appears.


1


If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

Main menu

Machine Manual operating mode


1


If you press a horizontal softkey within an operating mode or operating area, only the vertical softkey bar will change.

Machine Manual operating mode

Function within Machine Manual operating mode


1


When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the operator interface, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an operating area. This is done by pressing the "Expansion" key. Pressing the "ETC" key again will take you back to the original horizontal softkey bar.

Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the "Back" softkey to return to the next highest screen form.

Use the "Abort" softkey to exit a screen form without accepting the entered values and return to the next highest screen form.

When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and save the parameters using the "Accept" softkey.

Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename or delete a program.

On

Some softkeys are displayed with a black background when you activate the function assigned to them.

Program

test Off

In that case, you can deactivate the function by pressing the softkey again. The softkey will then have a gray background again.


1


1.3.3 Program views

You can display a work step program in various views.

Program manager In the program manager, you manage all your programs. You can also select a program here for machining the workpiece.

Program manager

-or- Select the program manager with the "Program" softkey or "Program Manager" key.

You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.

Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.

-or-

Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a program.


1


Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining steps of a program.

Process plan

You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the programming graphics.

Programming graphics The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a dynamic graphic with dashed lines. The program block selected in the process plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphics.

Programming graphics


1


Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with programming graphics is then displayed.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics complete with the parameters.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a parameterization screen form.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and the help display.


1


Parameter screen with help display

The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the parameters of the machining step individually.

Parameter screen with help display

The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:Yellow circle = reference point Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate


1


1.3.4 Entering parameters

On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter values in the white fields for various parameters. Parameters, whose input fields have a gray background, are automatically calculated by ShopTurn.

Parameter

White fieldinput

Unit

Gray fieldinput

Parameterization screen form

Selecting parameters

Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in the input field. Fields of this type do not allow you to type in a value.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required setting is displayed.

The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when the cursor is positioned on an input field that presents a choice of options. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.

Entering parameters

For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input field using the keys on the operator panel.

Enter the desired value.

Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.

-or- If you do not want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.


1


Selecting the unit

For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required unit is displayed.

The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when you have a choice of units for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.

Deleting parameters

If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.

-or-

Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

Changing or calculating parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather than overwriting the entire entry, switch to insertion mode. In this mode, the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during programming to calculate parameter values.

Press the "Insert" key.

Insertion mode and the pocket calculator are activated.

You can navigate within the input field using the "Left cursor" and "Right cursor" keys. Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.

For more information on the pocket calculator, see Section "Pocket calculator".

Accepting parameters

When you have correctly entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form, you can close the screen form and save the parameters.

-or-

Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key. If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the "Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the cursor in the leftmost input field.

You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly.


1


1.3.5 CNC ISO user interface

From the ShopTurn operator interface, you can switch to the CNC operator interface. There, you can activate remote diagnostics. This allows the controller to be operated via an external computer.

The machine manufacturer must have released the change from the

ShopTurn operator interface to the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. You can find a detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface

in: References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl SINUMERIK 840D sl /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

The remote diagnosis is a software option.

For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to: References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions, F3 Remote diagnosis

Interface utilisateur CNC

ISO

Press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the horizontal softkey bar.

-and-

Then press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the vertical softkey bar.


1


CNC-ISO operator interface

Press the "Menu Select" key if you want to return to the ShopTurn operator interface.

-and-

ShopTurn

Press the "ShopTurn” softkey.

Remote diagnosis

Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Diagnosis

Press the "Diagnosis” softkey.

Remote

diagnosis Press the "Remote diagnosis” softkey.


1


1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3)

There is ShopTurn software for the PCU 50.3 in the ShopTurn Open version.

In ShopTurn Open, the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services",

"Diagnosis", "Commissioning" and "Parameters" (without tool management and zero-point offsets) are located directly on the expanded horizontal softkey bar.

You can find a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced

operating areas in: References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

Some of the softkeys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.


2 01/2008 Setting up the machine 2


Setting up the machine 2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-46

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-46 2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated .................................................................... 2-48

2.3 Modes ....................................................................................................................... 2-49

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-50 2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches) ................................ 2-50 2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS) ............................................... 2-51 2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-52

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-54 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-57 2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually ........................................................................................ 2-63 2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.5 Calibrating the probe................................................................................................. 2-67 2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass ................................................................. 2-69

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero.................................................................................. 2-70

2.7 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................... 2-71 2.7.1 Setting the zero offset ............................................................................................... 2-72 2.7.2 Defining zero offsets ................................................................................................. 2-74 2.7.3 Zero offset list............................................................................................................ 2-75

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-77 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle ...................................................................................... 2-77 2.8.2 Traversing axes ........................................................................................................ 2-79 2.8.3 Positioning axes........................................................................................................ 2-81 2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece .......................................................................... 2-81 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-84

2.9 MDA .......................................................................................................................... 2-86

2.10 Run times .................................................................................................................. 2-87

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.1 Switching on and off

2


2.1 Switching on and off

To switch the controller or machine on and off, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen appears.

Basic manual machine screen

2.2 Approaching a reference point Your turning machine can be equipped with an absolute or

incremental path measuring system. An incremental path measuring system must be calibrated after being switched on, but an absolute path measuring system does not. For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes must therefore first approach a reference point, the coordinates of which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.

The sequence in which you must refer the axes is preset by the

machine manufacturer. The axes can also all approach the reference point simultaneously, depending on the manufacturer’s settings.


During the reference point traversing, the feedrate override is in effect.

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.2 Approaching a reference point

2


Notice

Before approaching the reference point, the coordinates of the actual value display are incorrect. In addition, the path limitations of the axes set by the machine manufacturer are not yet in effect.

Warning

During the reference point approach, the axes travel along a direct path to the reference point. Therefore, first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions when during the approach to the reference point. It is important that you observe the movement of the axes on the machine during the approach to the reference point.

Referencing axes

Jog

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X

Select the axis to be traversed.

… +

Press the "-" or “+” key.

The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with an icon.

If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not move.

Interrupting axis motion

Feed Stop

Press the "Feed Stop" key. The axis stops.

Approach again with axis

X

...

Select the axis to be moved and press the desired direction key.

The axis resumes moving in the direction of the reference point.

After the all machine axes have traversed to the reference point, the path measuring system is calibrated and the path limitations of the axes are in effect. The correct coordinates of the reference point are displayed in the actual value display.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.2 Approaching a reference point

2


2.2.1 User agreement with Safety Integrated

If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety Integrated functions.

You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has

approached the reference point.

The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software option.

For more information on user agreement, please refer to: References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Jog


Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X

…

Select the axis to be traversed.

… +

Press the "-" or “+” key.

The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with an icon.

User

agreement Press the "User agreement" softkey.

The "User agreement" window opens. It shows a list of all machine axes with their current and SI positions.

Position the cursor in the "Agreement" field for the axis in question.

-or-

Give your agreement by pressing the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.

The selected axis is marked with a cross meaning "safely referenced" in the "Agreement" column.

By pressing the "toggle keys," you again deactivate the agreement.

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.3 Modes

2


2.3 Modes There are various modes in which you can work in ShopTurn:

• Machine Manual • MDA (Manual Data Automatic) • Machine Auto

Machine Manual In "Machine Manual“ mode, there is a provision for the following

preparatory actions in manual mode:

• Approaching the reference point, i.e. calibrating the machine’s path measuring system

• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program

• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption • Positioning axes • Simple stock removal of workpiece

Jog

You can select the "Manual Machine“ mode using the "Jog" key. The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual mode with the exception of reference point approach.

Manual machine If you have the "Manual Machine" option, you are working in "Machine Manual" for the manual mode. Under "Machine Manual," you have the option of carrying out the following machining processes without having to write a program for them:

• Setting-up and simple traversing movements • Taper turning • Straight (plan or longitudinal turning) • Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,

threads) • Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping) • Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)

MDA In MDA mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.

MDA

You can select MDA mode via the "MDA" key.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.4 Settings for the machine

2


Machine Auto In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical display on the screen.

Auto

You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

2.4 Settings for the machine

2.4.1 Switching between units of measurement (millimeters/inches)

You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measure. Switching the unit of measure is done for the entire machine, i.e. ShopTurn automatically converts all the specifications to the new unit of measuresuch as:

• Positions • Tool offsets • Zero offsets

Independently of the general machine setting, you can change the unit of measure for manual mode (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode") or change it again for individual programs (see Sec. "Creating a New Program"). These settings for the unit of measure are only relative to the programmed positions. Tool offsets, zero-point offsets, etc. remain in the unit of measure of the entire machine. If, for example, you have set millimeters as the unit of measure for the machine, but a workpiece drawing is scaled in inches, you can select inches as the unit of measure for this program. This means that during programming, you can directly specify the positions in inches. On the other hand, tool offsets, feedrates, etc. must be set in millimeters as usual.

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode.

Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey.

Inch

Press the “Inch” softkey.

Inch

Unit of measurement: millimeters (softkey is deselected.) Inch

Unit of measurement: Inch (softkey is selected.)

A prompt asks you whether the unit of measure should really be switched.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The unit of measure for the entire machine is adapted.

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2


2.4.2 Switching between coordinate systems (MKS/WKS)

The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. The machine coordinate system (MKS), in contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WKS), does not take into consideration any zero-point offsets (see Sec. "Zero-point Offsets"). By default, the workpiece coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value display.

WCS MCS

Press the "WCS MCS" key.

-or-

Jog -or- Auto

Select the "Machine Manual" mode or "Machine Auto" mode.

-and-

Actual

value MCS Press the "Actual value MCS" softkey in order to select or

deselect this coordinate system. Actual

value MCS WKS (softkey is deselected.) Actual

value MCS MKS (softkey is selected.)

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.4 Settings for the machine

2


2.4.3 Spindles

In the "Spindles" screen form, you store the dimensions of the spindles on your machine.

Measuring a manual tool If you want to use the collet of the main or counter spindle as a

reference point during manual measuring, specify the collet dimensions ZL0 or ZL1.

Counterspindle You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-

spindle. The forward edge or stop edge automatically serves as the valid reference point when traversing the counter-spindle. This is especially important when gripping the workpiece with the counter-spindle (see Sec. "Machining with the Counter-spindle").

Front edge Stop edge

Dimensioning of the counter-spindle

Please observe the machine manufacturer’s specifications for the parameter "Tensioning."

Main spindle

Dimensioning of the main spindle

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2


Tailstock

Dimensioning of the tailstock

The length of the tailstock (ZR) and the diameter of the tail stock (XR) of the spindle screen are needed for the display of the tailstock in the simulation.

Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Press the "Expansion" key.

Press the "Spindles” softkey.

Enter the parameters.

The settings take effect immediately.

Parameter Description Unit

S1 Speed limit for the main spindle rev/min

Tensioning Main spindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside

ZL0 Main spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm

S3 Speed limit for the counter-spindle rev/min

Tensioning Counterspindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside

Endpiece type Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge

ZL1 Counter-spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm

ZL2 Counter-spindle stop dimensions (inc) mm

ZL3 Counter-spindle endpiece dimensions (inc) - (only for dimensioning the stop edge) mm

XR Tailstock diameter mm

ZR Tailstock length mm

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.5 Tools

2


2.5 Tools The various tool geometries must be taken into consideration while

the program is being executed. These are entered in the tool list as so-called tool offset data. For each call-up of a tool, the controller takes the tool offset data into consideration.

When programming therefore, you only have to enter the workpiece dimensions from the finishing drawing. After this, the controller independently calculates the individual tool path.

Tool length offset The tool length offset compensates for the length differences between

the various tools in the X and Z direction. The tool length is the distance between the tool-carrier reference point T and tool tip P. If the tool is tensioned in the revolver for a new machining direction, other tool length offsets will result.

T

T Length Z Length Z

Leng

th X

Leng

th X

P

P

X

Z

Tool length offsets

You can determine the tool length offset using the "Measure tool" function or manually with a probe or a magnifying glass. The control calculates the traversing movements from the tool length offset and wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2


Tool/cutting edge radius offset

The workpiece contour and the traversing path of a tool are not identical, since a tool should not move with its center-point along the contour that is to be finished. ShopTurn shifts the programmed tool path, depending on the radius of the tool and on the machining direction, such that the tool's cutting edge traverses exactly along the desired contour. This shifted tool path is called the equidistant.

EquidistantEquidistant

Equidistants during turning and milling

The controller calculates the shifted tool path from the tool radius entered in the tool list and the wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

You can find further information on radius offset in Sec. "Program blocks".


2


2.5.1 Creating a new tool

Before you can work with a new tool, you must first enter it in the tool list. When setting-up a new tool, ShopTurn makes a variety of tool types available to you. The tool type determines which geometry data are required and how they will be computed.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning. As with a turning tool, the direction of rotation must be specified.

Install the new tool in the revolver (see Sec. "Selecting the Tool

and Spindle").

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New >

tool Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughing

tool ... 3D_Probe

Select the desired tool type and position using the softkeys. Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge positions are made available to you.

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.


2


Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").

Enter the offset data of the tool.

2.5.2 Tool list

In the tool list, enter all the tool parameters that are needed:

• for calculating the tool length or radius offset, • for calculating the machining cycles, • for displaying the tools during the simulation of the program

execution.

Depending on the tool type, various parameters are required.

Le

ngth

X

Cutter radius

Length Z

Plat

e le

ngth

Toolholder angle

Plate angleCutting direction

Rougher/Finisher


2


Plat

e le

ngth

Radius Plate width

Leng

th X

Length Z

Recessing tool

Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Milling tool

Le

ngth

X

Diameter

Length Z

Tip angle

Drill

Leng

th X

Length Z

Radius

Threading tool


2


Leng

th X

Radius

Length Z

Button

Dia

met

er

Length Z Leng

th X

Stop

Le

ngth

X

Length Z

Bore Ø

Radius

Rotary drill

Toolholder angle

Plate angle

88° 90°

Rotary drill


2


Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Pitc

h

Screw tap

Length Z

Leng

th X

Dia

met

er

3D probe

Tool list

The tool list is adapted by the machine manufacturer if necessary.


Loc. Location number in the magazine

The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the machining position, has a gray background.

If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)

For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-gripper can also be displayed.


2



Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and cutting edge position Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge position.

Tool name The tool is identified by its name. You can enter the name as text or a number (see Sec. "Setting-up a New Tool").

DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool) (DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool, DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data Cutting edge Tool offset data for a selected cutting edge of a tool (D No.)

Length X Tool length offset in direction X You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Length Z Tool length offset in direction Z You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the diameter. For turning tools, you can only specify the cutting edge radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.


Reference direction for the holder angle

The holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

The plate angle of a cutting tool The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

Pitch Thread pitch of a tap drill in mm/rev or thread intervals/''


2


Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill

Plat.width Plate width of a pin The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.

Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the program execution simulation.

H The "H" column is displayed only if ISO dialects are set up. The number of the tool offset memory that belongs to the tool is displayed in the H column.

N The number of teeth for a milling machine From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of the tool tip for a drill When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into consideration.

Tool-specific functions

Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or counter-spindle for turning tools.

If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the tool.

CW spindle rotation

CCW spindle rotation

Spindle not switched on


2


Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off

Coolant ON

Coolant OFF

The coolant supply on the machine does not necessarily have to be set-up.


Enter the desired tool name and the values for the tool offset data

in the tool list.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key to carry out the desired settings for the tool-specific functions.

2.5.3 Measuring a tool manually

When measuring manually, manually traverse the tool to a known reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and Z directions. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool-carrier reference point and the reference point.

You can also use the workpiece edge as a reference point or, when

measuring in the Z direction, you can also use the main spindle or counter-spindle collets.

You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the measurement, However, you must make the position of the collet known before the measurement (see Sec. "Spindles").

Reference Point

Workpiece Edge

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

Press the "Manual" softkey.

X

-or- Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you

want to measure.

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey.

Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be entered in the tool list.


2


Back to

manual Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.

Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

Traverse the tool in the direction that is to be measured and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Measure length X Measure length Z

Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0. If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual value display.

Set

length Press the "Set length" softkey.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

Store

position If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the tool, press the "Store position" softkey. Then, for example, you can traverse the axes in order to manually measure the position of the workpiece edge X0 more easily.

Reference Point Collet

Jog


Manual >

Z

Press the "Manual" and "Z" softkeys.

Select the "main spindle collet" or "counter-spindle collet" reference point.

Tools



Back to


The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.


2


Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

Traverse to the collet and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Measure length Z

Set


The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a probe

During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the directions X and Z with the aid of a probe. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the known position of the tool-carrier reference point and the probe.

If you want to measure your tools with a probe, a special cycle for that

purpose must be set-up by your machine manufacturer.

If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.


Before the actual measurement, you must enter the cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You must also calibrate the probe beforehand.


2


Change-in the tool that you want to measure (see Sec. "Selecting

the Tool and Spindle").

Jog


Autom. >

Press the "Autom.” softkey.

X

-or- Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you

want to measure.

Measure length X Measure length Z Select the cutting edge number (D number) of the tool.

In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-spindle.

Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a way that any collisions can be avoided when the probe is being traversed in the corresponding direction.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed at the measurement feedrate to the probe and back again. The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.


2


2.5.5 Calibrating the probe

If you want to automatically measure your tools, you must first determine the position of the probe in the machine space in reference to the machine zero-point.

The "Calibrate probe" function is only available if an adequate level of

protection is set.


You must approach the probe from 4 directions (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) for calibration purposes. To do this, use a calibrating tool that you can use to approach the probe in all the required directions.

Z

X

Calibrating the tool probe with a calibration tool

The type (rougher or finisher) must be set for the probe. During this, the cutting edge must always point in the –X and –Z direction (cutting edge position 3). You must enter the length and the radius or diameter of the calibrating tool in the tool list.

If there is a second probe on the counter-spindle, the machine manufacturer must disclose this in a machine data element.



2


Change the calibrating tool.

Jog


Calibrate

meas. cal. Press the "Calibrate meas. cal.” softkey.

X

-or- Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which point of the

probe you wish to determine first.

Calibrate probe in X Calibrate probe in Z

In the event that there are two probes on the machine, select whether you want to use the probe on the main or counter-spindle.

Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like to approach the probe.

Position the calibrating tool in the vicinity of the probe in such a way that any collisions can be avoided when the first point of the probe is being approached.

Cycle Start


The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is automatically traversed at the measurement feedrate to the probe and back again. The position of the probe is determined and saved in an internal data area.

Repeat the process for the other 3 points of the probe.


2


2.5.6 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass

You can also use a magnifying glass to determine the tool dimensions, if this is available on the machine. During this, ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known positions of the tool-carrier reference point and the cross-hairs of the magnifying glass.

Jog


Magnifying

glass >

Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

Tools

Back to

manual



Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Bring the tool tip P into alignment with the cross-hairs of the magnifying glass.

Set


The tool lengths are calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

2


2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the

workpiece zero. To determine this zero, measure the length of the workpiece and save the position of the cylinder's face surface in the direction Z in a zero-point offset. This means that the position is stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The prerequisite for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known

lengths is in the machining position (see Sec. "Select Tool and Spindle").

Jog

Select the "Meas. workp." softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the desired offset in which the position of the cylinder front surface is to be saved.

-or- Work

offset Press the "Work offset” softkey.

-and- Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

-and- Back to


Traverse the tool in the direction Z and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Enter the desired position of the workpiece edge Z0.

Set work

offset Press the "Set work offset” softkey.

The workpiece zero-point and the accompanying zero-point offset are calculated. The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.

Example: Workpiece edge position setpoint Z0 = 0 Tool length offset Z = 37.6 mm ⇒ Z = -37.6

2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.7 Zero offsets

2


2.7 Zero offsets Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the

axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This zero offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combination of different offsets.

For ShopTurn, the actual value display of the positions is relative to the ENS coordinate system. The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.

The offsets are summated as follows:

Basic offset MCS

M

WCSW

Totaloffset

Work offset coarse

Coordinate transformation

Work offset fine

Zero offsets

When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least one offset (base offset or work offset) exists in which the position of the workpiece zero is saved.

Base offset The base offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base offset via "Zero-point workpiece" (see Sec. "Measuring the workpiece zero") or "Setting the zero offset" (see Sec. "Setting the zero offset").

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.7 Zero offsets

2


Zero offsets Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together). You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine offset.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections "Defining zero offsets" and "Calling work offsets".

Coordinate transformations

You always program coordinate transformations for a specific sequence program. They are defined by: • Translation • Rotation • Scaling • Mirroring (See Sec. "Defining the coordinate transformations")

Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate transformations.

2.7.1 Setting the zero offset

As an alternative to "Workpiece Zero-point," you can also save the zero-point of the workpiece via "Set ZPO".

The offset (active zero-point offset or base offset) in which the new

zero-point is saved is set in machine data.


If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The currently active work offset is displayed under the position windowfor the axes.

Traverse the machine axes to the desired position, e.g. to the

front surface of the workpiece (see Sec. "Traversing Axes").


2


If you do not want to save the zero-point in the currently active zero-point offset or in the base offset, select another zero-point offset (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode").

Jog

Select the "Set WO" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Setting the base zero-point offset

Enter the desired new position value for Z or X or Y directly into the actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to switch between axes.

Press the "Input" key.

-or-

Z=0

Press the "Z=0" softkey in case the position value is to be set to

zero.

The new zero-point is saved in the currently active zero-point offset or the base offset.

Delete

If you want to delete the saved zero-point, press the "Delete" softkey.


2


2.7.2 Defining zero offsets

Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The number of possible zero-point offsets is set in machine data.


Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating section.

The work offset list appears.

Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to define.

Enter the desired coordinates for the axis in question You can use the cursor keys to switch between axes.

-or-

Set X

... Set Z

Press the "Set X", "Set Y" or "Set Z" softkey to accept the position

value of an axis from the position display for a coarse offset.

-or-

Set

all Press the "Set all" softkey to accept the position values of all axes

from the position display for a coarse offset.

The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are included in the calculation and then deleted.

Delete

WO Press the "Delete WO" softkey to delete the coarse and fine offset

values at the same time.

Further

axes With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.



2


2.7.3 Zero offset list

The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on agray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.

If the turning machine has a counter-spindle, a display in the column

completely to the right also shows which zero-point offset for the machining with a counter-spindle was mirrored. If required, you can also deselect the mirroring of the zero-point offset.

Work offset list

Base offset

Basic reference The coordinates of the base offset appear. You can change these here in the list.

Zero offsets

ZPO1 ... ZPO4 The coordinates of the individual zero-point offsets (1st line coarse offset, 2nd line fine offset) are displayed. You can change these at this point in the list (see Sec. "Defining zero offsets"). Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.



2


You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.

Coordinate transformations

Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the coordinate system rotates. You cannot edit these values here.

Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed for the respective axis. You cannot edit these values here.

Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring" transformation is displayed. You cannot edit these values here.

Total offset

Total The total offset resulting from the base offset and all active work offsets and coordinate transformations appears.

Further

axes With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.




2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.8 Manual mode

2


2.8 Manual mode Always use "Machine Manual" mode when you want to set up the

machine for the execution of a program or to carry out simple traversing movements on the machine.

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle

Where preparatory actions in manual mode are concerned, the tool is selected and the spindle controlled centrally in a single screen form. In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2) for powered tools. Your turning machine can also be equipped with a counter-spindle (S3).

In manual mode, you can select a tool on the basis of either its name

or its revolver location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first searches for a name and then for a location number. This means that if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, the tool is selected from location number "5".

Using the revolver location number, therefore, you can swing around an empty space into the machining position and then comfortably install a new tool.

Selecting a tool

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter the name or the number of the tool T.

-or-

Tools

-or- Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" softkey or the "Offset"

key.

-and-

Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list. Only one tool can be selected from the revolver.

-and-

Back to


The tool is accepted into the "T, S, M... windows."

Select the tool cutting edge D or enter the number directly in the field.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.8 Manual mode

2


Cycle Start


The tool is automatically swung into the machining position and the name of the tool displayed in the tool status bar.

Start spindle

Jog


Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-spindle (S3) in the left input field of the spindle parameter.

Enter the desired spindle speed or cutting speed in the right-hand entry field.

If the machine has a gearbox for the spindle, set the gearing step.

In the field below it, select the direction of spindle rotation:

Spindle rotates clockwise

Spindle rotates counter-clockwise The M function is displayed next to the field.

Cycle Start


The spindle rotates.

Stopping the spindle

Jog


In the lower spindle field, select the "Spindle stop" function.

Cycle Start


The spindle stops.

Changing the spindle speed

Jog


Specify the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start


The spindle continues rotating at a new speed.


2


Positioning the spindle

Jog


Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-spindle (S3).

In the lower field, select the "Spindle position" function.

In the "Stop-Pos." parameter field, enter the desired spindle position (in degrees).

Cycle Start


A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route. A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.

2.8.2 Traversing axes

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis keys or handwheels. During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves by a specified increment with the programmed setup feedrate.

Depending on the machine manufacturer’s settings, you can

simultaneously traverse the axes.


The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.

Traversing the axes using the keyboard

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode.


Enter the desired value for the "Set-up feedrate" parameter in mm/min and mm/rev.

As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.


2


You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.

1

… 10000

Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000], in order to traverse the axis in a fixed increment. The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in micrometers or micro-inches. Example: For an increment of 100 µm (= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.

-or-

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode. -and-

Press the "ShopT. sett." softkey. -and-

Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter. Example: For an increment of 500 µm (= 0.5 mm), enter 500. -and-

VAR

Press the "Inc Var" key.

+X

Press an axis key in the corresponding direction.

Each time you press an axis key, the axis will traverse by the selected increment.

If you want to traverse several axes simultaneously, you must press the corresponding axis keys.

Traversing the axes with the handwheel

For information on the selection and function of the handwheels, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.


2


2.8.3 Positioning axes

In manual mode, you can traverse the axes to certain positions, in order to implement simple machining sequences. The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during traversing.

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Select the "Position" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter the target position for the axis or axes to be traversed.

Rapid

traverse

Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.

-or-

Press the "Rapid traverse" key.

Cycle Start


The axis is traversed to the specified target position. If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed simultaneously.

2.8.4 Simple stock removal of workpiece

Some blanks have a smooth or even surface. For example, you can use the stock removal cycle to turn the face surface of the workpiece before machining actually takes place.

The prerequisite for the simple stock removal of a workpiece in

manual mode is that a tool with known measurements is in the machining position (see Sec. "Selecting a Tool and Spindle").

If you want to turn out a collet using the stock removal cycle, you can program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.

Caution

The tool moves along a direct path to the start point of the stock removal. First move the tool to a safe position in order to avoid collisions during the approach.

You cannot use the "Repos" function during simple stock removal.


2


Jog

Select the "Stock removal" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter values for the parameters.


The input screen form closes.

Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start


The "Stock removal" cycle is started.

You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and correct the inputs.

Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.


2



F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks". In the left input field of the parameter spindle, you can choose between the main spindle (S1) and a counter spindle (S3). In the right input field, enter the spindle speed or the cutting speed.

Machining protection

Roughing

Finishing

Position Stock removal position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

Außen Innen

Z

X

parallel zur X-Achse (Plan)parallel zur Z-Achse (Längs)

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Stirnseite

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Rückseite

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Face Rear

parallel to X axis (plane)

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm

Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm

FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm

R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm

XF2 Undercut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm


2


2.8.5 Settings for manual mode

For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and work offsets and set the unit of measurement. Machine functions (M functions) are functions such as "Close door" or "Release collet," for example, that were made available as extras by the machine manufacturer.


In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance-defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". However, tool offsets and zero-point offsets remain in the original unit of measure, in which the machine was set (see Sec. "Switching the Unit of Measure (Millimeters/Inches)").

Selecting an M function

Jog


Enter the number of the desired M function in the "Misc M fct." parameter field. Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between the meaning and number of the function. Example:

M function Description ... ... M88 Close door ... ...

"88" must be entered in the input field, so that the door will be closed.

The M function will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

Selecting work offset

Jog


Select the desired zero-point offset.

-or-

Work

offset

Press the "Work offset” softkey.

-and-

Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.


2


Back to

manual -and-

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

The work offset will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

Setting the unit of measurement

Jog


Select the unit of measure.

The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.9 MDA

2


2.9 MDA In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic mode), you can enter G-code

commands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine.

When executing the G-code commands, you can control the sequence

as follows: • Executing the program block-by-block • Testing the program • Setting the test-run feedrate (see Sec. "Machining the workpiece")

MDA

Press the "MDA" key.

The MDA editor opens.

MDA

Input the desired G-code commands using the operator’s

keyboard.

Cycle Start


The control executes the input blocks.

Delete

MDA Prog. Depending on the machine manufacturer’s setting, the program created in MDA mode is automatically deleted after the complete execution, or you can delete it using the "Delete MDA Prog." softkey.


2 01/2008 Setting up the machine2.10 Run times

2


2.10 Run times ShopTurn provides a status window so that you can have an overview

of the most important machine run times at any time. It shows the following operating times.

Program Measurement of the program run time starts as soon as you press the "Cycle Start" key and stops on NC Stop or NC Reset. If you start a new program, timing starts again from the beginning.

Timing continues if dwell time is active, or during program runs with program test or dry run feedrate. Upon NC-Stop or feedrate override = 0, the timing stops.

Loaded By means of a program progress display, you can track what percentage of the called up program has already loaded. The display only appears when a program or subroutine is called up via an EXTCALL command or if a program is executed from the hard-disk.

Workpiece

The current repetition and the programmed number of program repetitions (e.g. Workpiece: 15/100) are displayed in work-step and G-code programs. In work-step programs, the number appears, but only if the number of programmed repetitions N is greater than 1 (see Sec. "Specifying the Quantity"). After a programmed number of repetitions (100,000), only the current program repetition is displayed due to lack of space (e.g. workpiece: 15). If no information is yet available about the current program repetition, only two dashes are displayed (e.g. Workpiece: - -/100). After the start of a program, the counter shows 0 for the current repetition.

For counting workpieces, specify the actual and desired numbers of workpieces as pre-settings (see Sec. "Parameterize workpiece counter").

Time The current time is displayed here.

Date Today's date is displayed.

Machine The machine run time displays how much time has elapsed since the control was last switched on.

Machining The machining time displays the total run time of all programs executed since the control was last switched on.

Machine statistic The system calculates the actual machine utilization from the timed machining time and the current machine run time. The ratio of machining time to machine run time is displayed as a percentage.

2 Setting up the machine 01/2008 2.10 Run times

2


A setting in the machine data determines which run times are displayed.


Jog or Auto

Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.

Run times

Press the "Run times" softkey.

The T,F,S display window turns into the "Run times" window. Pressing the "Run times" softkey again, takes you back to the T,F,S display window.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece 3


Machining the workpiece 3.1 Starting/stopping machining...................................................................................... 3-90

3.2 Running in a program ............................................................................................... 3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-94

3.4 Repositioning axes.................................................................................................... 3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point.......................................................... 3-96

3.6 Controlling the program sequence.......................................................................... 3-101

3.7 Overstoring.............................................................................................................. 3-103

3.8 Testing a program................................................................................................... 3-104

3.9 Correcting a program.............................................................................................. 3-105

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions....................................................................... 3-106

3.11 Simulating machining.............................................................................................. 3-107 3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece .......................................................... 3-109 3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece ..................................... 3-110 3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining ............................................ 3-111 3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program...................................................... 3-112 3.11.5 Different workpiece views ....................................................................................... 3-113 3.11.6 Changing the cutout................................................................................................ 3-117

3.12 Settings for automatic mode ................................................................................... 3-119 3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate..................................................................................... 3-119 3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter ................................................................... 3-120

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3


3.1 Starting/stopping machining During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically.

You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Only then can

you start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later. Apart from this, you have the option of graphically displaying the execution on the screen.

Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic" mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in "Machine Auto" mode. This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.


The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program: • The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the

machine. • A program created in ShopTurn is available. • The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

Sequence programs that you created in earlier versions of ShopTurn can also be executed in your current version. Once an older sequence program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is treated as a current ShopTurn program.

Select program (total)

-or-

Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want to select.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3


-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the required program.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.

ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Select program (by program block)

-or-



Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want to select.

-or-



Place the cursor on the required program.

-or-


The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run must begin.


ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode, loads the program, and carries out a block search to the highlighted program block (see Section "Starting at a Specific Point in the Program").

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3


Example for the program view in "Machine Auto" mode

When you select a program for the first time for execution, that contains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour pocket", the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps for the contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may take several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.

Starting machining

Cycle Start


The program is started and executed from the beginning or from the highlighted program block.

Stopping machining

Cycle Stop

Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execution.At the next start, execution is resumed at the same location where it stopped.

Canceling machining

Reset

Press the "Reset" key.

Execution of the program is interrupted. On the next start, machining will start from the beginning.

Starting program execution from an operating area

The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode is activated on the machine control panel.

Cycle Start


The program is started and executed from the beginning. However, the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the screen.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.2 Running in a program

3


3.2 Running in a program When running-in a program, ShopTurn can interrupt the machining of

the workpiece after each program block, which triggers a movement or auxiliary function on the machine. In this way, you can control the machining result block-by-block during the initial run-through of a program on the machine.

For drilling and pocket milling, the entire machining process and a

plane machining process (respectively) are compiled into one block. Drilling and pocket machining processes can be split up into single blocks using the "Single block fine" function. In addition, machining at this setting is stopped after each individual contour element of a contour.

Single block Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key.

Cycle Start


The first block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops. In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended" appears.

Cycle Start


The next block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops again.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key again, if the machining is not supposed to run block-by-block. (The key is then deselected again.)

If you now press the "Cycle Start" key again, the program is executed to the end without interruption.

Single block, fine Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Single

Block Fine

Press the softkeys "Prog. Cntrl.“ and "Single Block Fine," in order to execute each individual drilling position and each individual pocket milling movement as its own block.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key.

Continue as described under "Single Block".

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.3 Displaying the current program block

3


3.3 Displaying the current program block If you want precise information about axis positions and key G

functions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show the basic block display.

You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when

machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block: • Absolute axis positions • G functions for the first G group • Other modal G functions • Other programmed addresses • M functions

The basic block display function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Basic Block

Press the "Basic Block" softkey.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program block by block.

Cycle Start

Start program execution.

The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.4 Repositioning axes

3


3.4 Repositioning axes After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool

breaks) you can move the tool away from the contour in manual mode. ShopTurn saves the coordinates of the position at the time of the interruption and displays the path differences that the axes traversed in manual mode in the actual value window. This path difference is called "Repos-offset".

Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in order to continue executing the program.

You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the

control system. The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect.

Warning

When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate andlinear interpolation, i.e. in a straight line from the current position to the interrupt point. Therefore, you must first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions.

If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the axes in manual mode after a program interrupt, ShopTurn automatically moves the axes during the switch to automatic mode and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line back to the interrupt point.

The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes: • The program execution was interrupted using "Cycle Stop". • The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in

manual mode.

Repos

Press the "Repos" key.

+X

Select each axis that is to be moved sequentially in the corresponding direction.

The axes are moved to the interrupt position.

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3


3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the

machine, there is no obligation to start execution of the program from the beginning; you can also start processing from a specific program block or text string.

The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called

the "target". ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different types of targets: • ShopTurn cycle • Misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block • Any text

For target type "misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block", you can again specify the target on 3 different paths: • Position cursor on target block

This is ideal for straightforward programs. • Choose point of interruption

Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier. This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple program levels.

• Specify target directly This option is only possible if you know the precise data (program level, program name etc.) of the target.

After specifying the target, ShopTurn then calculates the exact start point for the program execution. For the target types "ShopTurn cycle" and "any text" the calculation is always done to the end point of the block. When calculating the start point of all other ShopTurn blocks and G-code blocks, you can choose between four variants.

Calculation variants

1. Calculation to contour: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from the start of the target block, identically to normal program execution.

2. Calculation to end point: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of the target block.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3


3. Without calculation During the block search, ShopTurn does not perform any calculations, i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block. The parameters within the control contain the values valid before the block search. This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise G code blocks.

4. External - without calculation This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive), calculation is skipped until the target block is reached. This helps to speed up the calculation process.

Notice Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not calculated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External – without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after which all the information needed for machining is included.

Specifying a target directly

In the "Search pointer" screen form, directly specify the target for the target type "miscellaneous ShopTurn block or G-code block." Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all other levels correspond to subroutines. You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main program, you must enter the target in program level 2. The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means, for example, that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1 (main program).

The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the following meaning: Number of program level Program: Program name (the name of the main program is automatically entered.) Ext: File extension P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated several times, you can specify the repetition number at which you wish machining to be resumed.)


3


Line: Parameter is given by ShopTurn Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level N no. Block number Marker Jump marker Text Character string Sub-r. Subprogram call Line Line number Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start

Selecting the ShopTurn

cycle


Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Start

search run

Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

During the block search run on the position pattern, the skipped positions are not counted.


Cycle Start


ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3


Selecting the misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block

Position cursor on target block


Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Press the "Block search" softkey.

To

contour ... External -

without cal.

Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new starting position is approached. The program executes from the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation technique.

Reset


Select point of interruption Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the

"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of interruption)

Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.

Search

pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.

Interrupt

point Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.

ShopTurn inserts the saved interrupt point as a target.

To


without cal.


Cycle Start



Cycle Start



Reset



3


Specify target directly Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section


Search

pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.

Specify the desired target.

To


without cal.


Cycle Start



Cycle Start



Reset


Searching for any text Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section


Search

Press the "Block search" and "Search" softkeys.

Enter the text string that you want to locate.

Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

The program block that contains the text string is marked.

Continue

search Press the "Continue search" softkey, if you want to continue the

search.

Start

search run

Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window and press the "Accept" softkey. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position and press the "Accept" softkey. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.6 Controlling the program sequence

3


Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset


3.6 Controlling the program sequence If you want to check previously obtained results while machining a

workpiece, you can have the machining stop at specially marked points (programmed stop). Within the sequence program, the stop occurs at the “safety distance” position.

Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). This is not possible with sequence blocks.

You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the handwheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Programmed stop Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Program.

stop Press the "Program. stop" softkey.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. The program stops at each block for which the G-code command "M01" was programmed (see Sec. "G-code in the sequence program").

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.

Execution of the program is continued.

Program.

stop Press the "Program. stop" softkey again if you want the program

to be executed without a programmed stop. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.6 Controlling the program sequence

3


Skipping G code blocks Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see the section titled "Starting/stopping program execution").


Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character (slash) in front of the block number are not executed.

Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey again if you want the marked G code

blocks to be executed again during the next run. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Allowing DRF offset Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section



DRF

offset Press the "DRF offset" softkey.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the machining process directly.

DRF

offset Press the "DRF offset" softkey again if you no longer want to allow

handwheel offsets during machining. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.7 Overstoring

3


3.7 Overstoring In "Machine Auto" mode, you can overstore technological parameters

(auxiliary functions, programmable instructions, etc.) in the work storage unit of the NCK. You can also enter and execute any NC block.

Overstore does not alter the programs stored in the part program memory.

Overstore with single

block

Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section "Selecting a program for execution").

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key to execute the program block by block.

The program automatically stops at the next block boundary.

Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window is opened. Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start


The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in the "Overstore" window.

After "Overstore", a subroutine with the content REPOSA, which you can observe, is executed.

Overstore without single

block

Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section "Selecting a program for execution").

Cycle Stop

Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window is opened. Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start


3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.8 Testing a program

3


The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution of the blocks in the "Overstore" window.

After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks again.

Stopping overstore

Press the "Back" key to exit "Overstore".

The window is closed. You can switch modes now.

Cycle Start

After you have pressed "Cycle Start" again, the selected program continues before overstore.

3.8 Testing a program To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass

of the program on the machine, first test the program without moving the machine axes.

During testing, ShopTurn checks the program for the following

inadmissible conditions:

• Geometric incompatibility • Missing data • Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps • Violation of working area

ShopTurn automatically detects syntax errors when it is loading a program in "Machine Auto" mode.

Whether ShopTurn executes auxiliary functions (M and H functions) during the program test is dependent upon the machine manufacturer’s settings.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The following functions can be used during the program test: • Stop execution with “Programmed Stop” (see Section “Controlling

the program run”) • Graphical display on the screen (see Section "Simultaneous

recording before machining a workpiece")

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.9 Correcting a program

3


Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section



Program

test Press the "Program test" softkey.

Cycle Start


The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.

Program

test Press the "Program test" softkey again to deactivate test mode on

completion of the program. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

3.9 Correcting a program As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while loading a program

in "Machine Auto" mode, the error is displayed in the alarm line. You can then correct the program in the program editor.

Depending on whether the program is in the NC stop or reset state

after being interrupted by ShopTurn, you can make various corrections.

• NC Stop status: You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the

machine or read by the NCK. • Reset status:

You can modify all blocks.

Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey

The program appears in the "Program" operating area and the erroneous block is highlighted.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The parameter screen form is displayed.

Input the corrections.


The correction is applied to the current program.


The program is reloaded in "Machine Auto" mode and you can start the machining of the workpiece.

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions

3


3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for

example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display of the G functions or auxiliary functions.

16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G-

group, only the G functions that are currently active in the NCK appear. In addition, you can see the currently active transformation in the top line of the window.

As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are listed in "All G Func.".

Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger reactions defined by the manufacturer.


A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.

You can have the G functions that are currently active in the NCK displayed during execution of a sequence program too, since the ShopTurn functions are internally translated into G-code.

G function

Press the "G function" softkey in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

Auto" mode.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions within a G group will be displayed. If you press the "G function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

All G

func. Press the "All G func." softkey.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are now listed. If you select the "All G func." softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

Auxiliary

function Press the "Auxiliary function" softkey.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3


3.11 Simulating machining You can graphically display the execution of the program on the

screen, in order to easily control the programming result without moving the machine axes. In this way, you can detect incorrectly programmed machining steps early on and prevent erroneous machining of the workpiece. In addition, you can conveniently track the machining of the workpiece on the machine via the graphical display, if the view of the working area is blocked by coolant, for example.

In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece, the tools, the

counterspindle and the headstock on the screen in the correct proportions, i.e. the programmed blank dimensions from the program header are used for the workpiece and the tools are displayed with various symbols, depending on the the tool type and size. For displaying the counter spindle and headstock, the dimensions are taken from the “spindle” input screen form (see Sec. "Spindles").

For the graphical display of G-code programs, ShopTurn displays a pre-defined blank shape, which you can modify as you wish.

Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning machining processes in the main program, ShopTurn displays the corresponding finished-part contour for them at the start of the graphical display. Thus, you can easily compare the current contour with the finished-part contour, and also detect where possible residual material might remain when machining.

Display variants You can choose between three variants of graphical display: • Simulation before machining the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-through. The machine axes do not move during this.

• Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program with a test run feedrate. The machine axes do not move during this. In contrast to the simulation, you can use the functions for program control, i.e. you can stop the graphical execution or have it run block-by-block.

• Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece While the program is being executed on the machine, you can track the machining of the workpiece on the screen as well.

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.11 Simulating machining

3


Views For all three variants, the following views are available:

• 3-window view

• Side view

• Face view

• Volume model

The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate

In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops.

In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the programblock currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also displayed in the simulation.

Transformations Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording: • Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed

as programmed. • In the graphical display, zero-point offsets (G54, ...) only lead to

the offsetting of the zero-point in the Z direction.

Counter spindle If you open or close the collet of the main spindle or counter-spindle during programming via M functions, ShopTurn can only display this graphically if the M functions are assigned via machine data cycles.



3


3.11.1 Simulating prior to machining the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-through on the screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.

Feedrate override is also active during simulation.

0%: The simulation stops. ≥ 100%: The program is executed as fast as possible. Feedrate override for simulation must be activated via a machine data code.


Starting the simulation

-or- Press the softkey or the "Program" key.


Place the cursor on the directory in which you would like to simulate a program.

-or-



Place the cursor on the program that you would like to simulate.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.

Press the "Simulation" softkey.

Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The machine axes do not move during this.

Details

Single

Block Press the "Details" and "Single Block" softkeys if you wish to

process the program block by block.


3


Stop simulation

Press the "Stop" softkey.

Simulation is stopped.

Aborting simulation

Press the "Reset" softkey.

Simulation is aborted and the unmachined blank shape of the workpiece is displayed again.

Resuming simulation

Press "Start" softkey.

Simulation is resumed.

End simulation

End

Press the "End" softkey.

The machining plan or programming graphic for the program is displayed again.

3.11.2 Simultaneous recording prior to machining the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program on the screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can replace the programmed feedrate with a test-run feedrate in

order to control the execution speed (see Sec. "Establishing the test-run feedrate").

In addition, you can interrupt or control the graphical execution, i.e. the functions for program control such as "NC Stop," "Single Block," "Feedrate override," etc. are in effect.

If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of the graphical display, you can switch to the program view. This function must be set-up via machine data.



3



Program

test

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" softkeys.

Dry run

feedrate Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey, if the programmed feedrate

speed is to be replaced by a test-run speed.

Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start


Program processing will be graphically displayed on the screen. The machine’s axes do not move.

Dry run

feedrate Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey again, if the parallel drawing

is to run in the programmed feedrate speed. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Program

view Press the "Program view" softkey if you would like to switch away

from the graphical display into the program view of the "Machine Auto" mode. Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.

…

Press one of the 4 softkeys for the graphical views, if you would like to return to the graphical display.

3.11.3 Simultaneous recording during workpiece machining

If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while the workpiece is being machined, you can also track the program processing on the screen.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can switch on the function for simultaneous recording of the

machining process even if workpiece machining has already begun to take place on the machine. This function must be set-up via machine data.



3



Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start


Workpiece machining is started and graphically displayed on the screen.

3.11.4 Changing a blank shape for a G code program

G-code programs typically do not contain a description of the shape of the blank. For the graphical display, ShopTurn therefore uses a pre-defined shape for the blank. You can modify it as you wish.

-or-

Select "Simulation" or "Real-sim."

Details

>

Press the softkeys "Side View" and "Details".

Settings

Press the "Settings" softkey.

Select the shape of the blank (cylinder, tube, square, or N-angle).

Input the desired dimensions.

Press the "Back" softkey.

During the next graphical display of a G-code program, the input dimensions are taken into consideration.


3


3.11.5 Different workpiece views

In the graphical display, you can choose between different views so that you constantly have the best view of the current workpiece machining, or in order to display details or the overall view of the finished workpiece.

The following views are available:

• Side view The display shows the workpiece, partly in the longitudinal view, and partly the peripheral surface.

• Face view The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The face of the workpiece is displayed by default. The viewing direction is always from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be performed from behind or from the back side.

• Volume model The volume model is a 3-D display of the workpiece that does not appear while the simulation is running but only if you stop the simulation.

The volume model is a software option.

• 3-window view

The 3-window view shows the side and front view and, on the PCU 50.3, a volume model. A cut-away change occurs synchronously for the side and front view. The cut-away of the volume model cannot be changed here. In the volume model, ShopTurn only displays drilling and milling work continuously. The turning work is only updated when you change to drilling or milling work.

You can still move the displayed cutout in any view.

If there is no longer sufficient storage space for the graphical display, ShopTurn fades out the blank. You can still see the side and front view as dashed-line graphics.


3


Side view

Press the "side view" softkey.

Side view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".


3


Face view

Press the "Face view” softkey.

Face view

Details

> Press the "Details" softkey, if you want to pan the cross-section in

the Z direction.

-and-

Z Cut

+ or Press the "Z Cut +" or "Page Up" key in order to pan the cross-

section in a positive Z direction.

-or-

Z Cut

- or Press the "Z Cut -" or "Page Down" key in order to pan the cross-

section in a negative Z direction.

You can find further information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".


3


Volume model

Press the "Volume model” softkey.

Volume model

Displaying the volume model

Press the "Stop" softkey if you would like to display the volume model at the current point in the machining.

Press the "Side view" and "Start" softkeys if you would like to continue the simulation.

Changing the view Details

> Press the "Details" softkey if you want to change the view.

-and-

or

Press the "View " or "View " softkey to rotate the workpiece about the X axis.

-or-

Press the "View " softkey to rotate the workpiece about the Z axis.

-or-

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey to cut up the workpiece.

-and-

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey again if the volume model is to be

displayed in full again.

You can find further information on changing the cut-away in

Sec. "Changing the cut-away".


3


3-window view

Press the "3-window view” softkey.

3-window view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3.11.6 Changing the cutout

If you would like to pan, enlarge, or decrease the size of the cut-away on the graphical display, e.g. to view details or display the complete workpiece, use the Zoom or magnifying glass.

Increase or decrease the size of the existing cut-away from the center

using the zoom function. Then you can pan the new cut-away. Using the magnifying glass, you can first define the cut-away and then increase or decrease its size.

The zoom/magnifying settings are program-specific, i.e. the settings are retained if you change the cut-away and switch to the work plan and then back to the graphics, for example. If you then simulate the new program, ShopTurn will use the default settings of zoom and the magnifying glass. But you can also return to the default display of the workpiece from a changed cut-away.

In addition, you can delete the previously drawn machining lines in the graphics in order to get a clear display.


3


Details

> Press the "Details" softkey.

Original cut-away Back to

original

Press the "Back to original" softkey to restore the original size of the viewport.

The workpiece on the main spindle or counter-spindle appears.

Zoom Zoom

+ or +

Press the "Zoom +" or "+" softkey if you would like to enlarge the

cut-away.

-or-

Zoom

- or Press the "Zoom -" or "-" softkey if you would like to decrease the

size of the cut-away.

-or-

Press a cursor key if you want to pan the cut-away up, down, left, or right.

The new cut-away appears.

Magnifying glass Magnifying

glass Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.

Press a cursor key if you want to move the magnifying glass up, down, left, or right.

Magnifying

glass + Press the "Magnifying glass +" softkey if you want to enlarge the

cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.

-or-

Magnifying

glass - Press the "Magnifying glass -" softkey if you want to decrease the

size of the cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.

Magnifying

glass zoom Press the "Magnifying glass zoom” softkey.

The new cut-away appears.

Deleting machining lines

Press the "Del" key.

The previous machining lines are deleted.

3 01/2008 Machining the workpiece3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3


3.12 Settings for automatic mode

For automatic mode, configure the pre-settings for the following functions:

• Program sequence under Automatic For graphical display of a program, the feedrate of the test-run can be specified.

• Workpiece counter For counting workpieces in G-code programs, counters are available, which display the number of needed workpieces as well as the total number of workpieces produced.

3.12.1 Defining a test run feedrate

Before machining a workpiece, test the program without moving the

machine axes. For early detection of programming errors, the parallel drawing function is available to you. For this, you can use your own preset test-run feedrate (see Section "Parallel drawing before machining the workpiece").

The feedrate can be changed while the operation is running.

Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey bar.


In "Test-run feedrate", enter the desired test-run speed.

3 Machining the workpiece 01/2008 3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3


3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter

With the aid of the "ShopTurn Settings," you can control the counter activation and the time of the zeroing. The display of the needed and currently machined workpieces is displayed in the machine run-time window (see Section "Run-times").

Number of workpieces

Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey bar.


Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired workpieces" field.

The number of workpieces finished since the program started is displayed in the "Actual workpieces" field. After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current workpieces display is automatically reset to zero.

The choice of counter depends on the machine data setting. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The desired and actual numbers for the workpiece counter can also be changed during program execution.

4 01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program 4


Creating a ShopTurn program 4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-122

4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-124 4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-124 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction ............................................................... 4-126 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-128 4.2.4 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 4-130 4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-131 4.2.6 Adjustments ............................................................................................................ 4-133

4.3 Sequence program ................................................................................................. 4-134 4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-134 4.3.2 Creating a new program ......................................................................................... 4-136 4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-140 4.3.4 Changing program blocks ....................................................................................... 4-144 4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-145 4.3.6 Specifying a quantity............................................................................................... 4-148

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008 4.1 Program structure

4


4.1 Program structure A sequence program is divided into three sub-areas:

• Program header • Program blocks • End of program These sub-areas form a machining plan.

Programheader

Programend

Programblocks

Program structure

Program header

The program header contains parameters that affect the entire program, such as blank dimensions or retraction planes.

Program blocks

You determine the individual machining steps in the program blocks. In doing this, you specify the technology data and positions, among other things.

Technology data andpositions

Plain text, e.g. type of machining

Block number allocatedby control

Symbol of machining cycle Program block

Linked program blocks

For the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling", and "Drilling" functions, program the technology blocks and contours or positioning blocks separately. These program blocks are automatically linked by the controller and connected by brackets in the work plan. In the technology blocks, specify how and in what form the machining should take place, e.g. centering first, and then drilling. In the positioning blocks, determine the positions for the drilling or milling machining, e.g. position the drill-holes in a full circle on the front surface.

4 01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program4.1 Program structure

4


Technology blocks

Positioning blocks Technology block and positioning block

Technology blocks

Contours

Contour and technology block

End of program

End of program signals to the machine that the machining of the workpiece has ended. In addition, you can specify the number of workpieces that you would like to machine.

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008 4.2 Fundamentals

4


4.2 Fundamentals

4.2.1 Machining planes

A workpiece can be machined on different planes. Two coordinate axes define a machining plane. On turning machines with X, Z, and C axes, three planes are available: • Turning • Face • Peripheral

The face and peripheral machining planes require the CNC-ISO functions "Front surface machining" (Transmit) and "Cylindrical peripheral transformation" (Tracyl) to be set up.

These functions are a software option.

For turning machines with an additional Y axis, the machining planes

are expanded to include two more planes: • Face Y • Peripheral Y Therefore, the face and peripheral planes are called Face C and Peripheral C.

If the Y axis is an oblique axis (i.e. the axis is not perpendicular to the others), you can also select the "Face Y" and "Peripheral Y" machining planes and program the traversing movements in Cartesian coordinates. The control system then automatically transforms the programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate system into the traversing movements of the oblique axis. For the transformation of the programmed traversing movements, ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Oblique Axis" (Traang).

This function is a software option.

The machining plane selection is integrated into the parameter screen

forms of the individual drilling and milling cycles. For turning cycles and for "axial drilling" and "axial threads", ShopTurn automatically selects the Turning plane. For the "straight" and "circle" functions, you must specify the machining plane separately.

The settings for the machining plane always act modally, i.e. until you select another plane.

4 01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4


The machining planes are defined as follows:

Z

XY

Face

Turning

Peripheral surface

Machining planes

Turning

The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X plane (G18).

Face/Face C

The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the X/Y coordinates you entered into a movement in the X and C axis. You can use face surface machining with a C axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the face surface. You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this purpose.

Peripheral/Peripheral C

The Peripheral/Peripheral C machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). For machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the Y/Z coordinates you entered into a movement in the C and Z axis. You can use peripheral surface machining with a C axis for drilling andmilling if, for instance, you want to mill a slot with constant depth on the peripheral surface. You can choose between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.

Face Y

The Face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). You can use the face surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket on the front surface. You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this purpose.


4


Peripheral Y

The Peripheral Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). You can use peripheral surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you want to mill a pocket with a level bottom on the peripheral or create drill holes that do not point to the center. You can choose between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.

4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retraction

Approaching and retracting during the machining cycle always follows the same pattern if you have not defined a special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle"). If the machine has a tailstock, you can also take this into consideration when traversing.

The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle").

When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

Machining cycle approach/return

• The tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest path from the tool change point to the retraction plane, which runs parallel to the machining plane.

• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance. • Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed

machining feedrate. • After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the

safety distance. • The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the

retraction plane.


4


• From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest path to the tool change point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.

The spindle (main, tool, or counter-spindle) begins to rotate immediately after the tool change.

You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, and the safety distance in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").

Taking the tailstock into consideration

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

XR

Approach/return allowing for a tailstock

• The tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool change point along the shortest path to the protective plane XR from the tailstock.

• After this, the tool moves in rapid traverse on the retraction plane in the X direction.

• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance. • Following this, the workpiece is machined at the programmed

machining feedrate. • After machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to the

safety distance. • The tool then continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the

retraction plane. • After this, the tool travels in the direction X to the protective plane

XR from the tailstock. • From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest

path to the tool change point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.

You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, the safety distance, and the protective area for the tailstock in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").


4


4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions

When creating a sequence program, you can input positions in absolute or incremental dimensions, depending on how the workpiece drawing is scaled.

You can also use a combination of absolute and incremental dimensions, i.e. one coordinate as an absolute dimension and the other as an incremental dimension.

For the plan axis (the X axis, in this case), in the machine data it is

established whether the diameter or radius is programmed in absolute or incremental dimensions.


Absolute dimensions (ABS)

With absolute dimensions, all position specifications refer to the zero point of the active coordinate system.

Z

X

7.515

2535

P4

P3 P2

P1

Ø 2

5 Ø 4

0 Ø 6

0

Absolute dimensions

The position specifications for the points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions refer to the zero-point: P1: X25 Z-7.5 P2: X40 Z-15 P3: X40 Z-25 P4: X60 Z-35


4


Incremental dimensions (INC)

With incremental dimensions (also referred to as sequential dimensions) a position specification refers to the previously programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the path to be traversed. As a rule, the plus/minus sign does not matter when entering the incremental value. ShopTurn only evaluates the amount of the increment. For some parameters, the plus/minus sign specifies the traversing direction. These exceptions are identified in the parameter table of the individual functions.

Z

X

7.510

P4

P3 P2

P1

7.510

107.

5

Incremental dimensions

The position specifications for points P1 to P4 in incremental dimensions are as follows: P1: X25 Z-7.5 (relative to the zero-point) P2: X15 Z-7.5 (relative to P1) P3: Z-10 (relative to P2) P4: X20 Z-10 (relative to P3)


4


4.2.4 Polar coordinates

You can specify positions using right-angled coordinates or polar coordinates. If a point in a workpiece drawing is defined by a value for each coordinate axis, you can easily input the position into the parameter screen form using right-angled coordinates. For workpieces that are dimensioned with arcs or angular data, it is often easier if you input the positions using polar coordinates.

You can only program polar coordinates for the functions "Straight

circle" and "Contour milling."

The point from which dimensioning starts in polar coordinates is called the "pole".

Pole

X

Z

P1P2

P3

30

3030

30°30°

30°

Polar coordinates

The position specifications for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar coordinates are: Pole: X30 Z30 (relative to the zero-point) P1: L30 α30° (relative to the pole) P2: L30 α60° (relative to the pole) P3: L30 α90° (relative to the pole)


4


4.2.5 Pocket calculator

You can use the pocket calculator to quickly calculate parameter values during programming. If, for example, the diameter of a workpiece is only dimensioned indirectly in the workpiece drawing, i.e.the diameter must be derived from the sum of several other dimension specifications, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field of this parameter.

The calculation of a parameter value is always done in the input field

of the parameter. In doing this, you can perform as many calculations as you wish using the following kinds of calculations.

• Operators + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division () Parentheses MOD Modulo Operation AND AND operator OR OR operator NOT NOT operator

• Constants PI 3.14159265358979323846 TRUE 1 FALSE 0

• Functions SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees) COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees) TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees) ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees) SQRT(x) Square root of x ABS(x) Absolute value of x

You can input a maximum of 256 characters in a field.


4


Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.

or =

Press the "Insert" or “=” key.

The calculator is active.

Input the arithmetic statement. You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.

or =

Press the "Input" or “=” key.

The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The calculator is switched off.

If you would first like to delete an old value in an input field, press the "Backspace" key.

Example: Tool wear +0.1 Position the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear list.


Input the calculating instructions: + 0.1


Example: Calculating the diameter

40

160

30

∅50

∅A∅12

0

Workpiece drawing


4


Position the cursor on the input field “X” in a parameter screen form.


Input the calculating instructions: 30 * 2 + 50


4.2.6 Adjustments

If you would like to finish your workpiece to an exact fit, you can input the master dimension directly into the parameter screen form during programming.

Specify the master dimension as follows:

F<Diameter/Length> <Tolerance class> <Tolerance quality>

For this, "F" identifies that a master dimension follows.

Example: F20h7

Possible tolerance classes: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, T, U, V, X, Y, Z Upper case letter: Drill-holes Lowercase letters: Shafts

Possible tolerance qualities: 1 to 18, if they are not restricted by DIN standard 7150.

Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.

Input the fit.


The control system automatically calculates the mean value from the upper and lower limit value.

If you would like to input a lowercase letter, highlight the input uppercase letter with the cursor and press the "Select" key. If you press the key again, the uppercase letter reappears.

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 01/2008 4.3 Sequence program

4


4.3 Sequence program For sequence programs that you create directly at the machine, you

require a software option.

4.3.1 Overview

When creating a sequence program, always proceed according to the following diagram:

• Create a new program • Assign a program name • Fill out the program head • Program individual machining steps

The following listed machining steps can be selected.

Tool

>

Straight

>

Circle center

point >

Circle

radius >

Polar

>

Approach/

Retract >

Drilling

centric >

Thread

centric >

Drilling

reaming >

Deep hole

drilling >

Thread

> Tapping

Thread

drilling

Positions

>

Repeat

position >

Stock

removal >

4 01/2008 Creating a ShopTurn program4.3 Sequence program

4


Recess

>

Undercut

>

Thread

>

Parting

>

New

contour >

Stock

removal >

St. remov.

resid. >

Grooving

>

Grooving

resid. >

Plunge-

turning >

Plunge-turn.

resid. >

Pocket

>

Spigot

>

Slot

>

Multiple

edge >

Engraving

Contour

milling > New

contour >

Path

milling >

Predrilling

>

Pocket

milling

Pocket

resid. mat.

Spigot

milling

Spigot

resid. mat.


4


Set

marker >

Repeat >

Sub-

routine >

Counter-

spindle >

Settings

>

Transfor-

mations > Work

offset >

Offset

>

Rotation

>

Scaling

>

Mirroring

>

Rotation

C axis

4.3.2 Creating a new program

For each new workpiece that you would like to finish, create an individual program. The program contains the individual machining steps that must be performed for finishing the workpiece.

If you create a new program, a program header and program end are

automatically defined. In the program header, you must set the following parameters, which are active during the entire program.

WO The zero-point offset in which the zero-point of the workpiece is saved. You can also delete the pre-setting of the parameter if you do not want to specify a zero-point offset.

Unit of measurement

The unit of measure (millimeters or inches) in the program header is set in relation to the position specifications in the current program. All other specifications, such as feedrate or tool offsets, are entered in theunit of measure that you have set for the entire machine.

Blank

For the blank of the workpiece, you must define the shape (cylinder, tube, rectangle, or N-angle) and the dimensions. W: Blank width – only for rectangle L: Blank length – only for rectangle N : Number of edges – only for N-angle


4


L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – only for N-angle SW: Key width (alternative to L) – only for N-angle XA: Outside diameter (abs) – only for cylinder and tube XI: Inside diameter (abs or inc) – only for tube ZA: Initial dimension (abs) ZI: End dimension (abs or inc) ZB: Machining dimension (abs or inc)

Cylinder blank

Tube blank

Retraction

The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing of the axes must be possible. For each infeed direction, you define a retraction plane that is only traversed in that direction during positioning. The retraction planes depend on the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple, expanded, or all). XRA: Outer retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.) XRI: Inner retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.) ZRA: Outer retraction plane in direction Z (abs. or inc.) ZRI: Inner retraction plane in direction Z (inc.)

The retraction planes XRA and XRI are always placed in a circle around the blank, even for rectangular and N-angle blanks.

Retraction tube: Simple

Retraction tube: all


4


The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle").

A change to the retraction plane is already in effect during retraction from the previous machining (see Sec. "Changing program settings").

When selecting the traversing paths, ShopTurn always takes the tool tip into account; i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into consideration. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes are an appropriate distance away from the workpiece.

Tailstock

If your machine has a tailstock, you can further expand the retraction area so that collisions with the tailstock will be avoided when traversing the axes. Enter the retraction plane XRR of the tailstock in absolute dimensions.

Tool change point

The revolver travels to the tool change point with its zero point and then positions the required tool in the machining position. The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the revolver is moving. Either you establish the current tool position as a tool change point (teaching a tool change point) or you must input the coordinates of the tool change point XT and ZT directly into the parameter screen form. Teaching in the tool change point is only possible if you have selected the machine coordinate system (MKS).

Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver and not the tool tip.

Tool change point


4


Safety distance

The safety distance SC defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece in rapid traverse. You must input the safety distance incremental dimensions without a preceding symbol.

Speed limits

If you want to machine the workpiece with a constant cutting speed, ShopTurn must increase the spindle speed once the workpiece diameter becomes smaller. Since the speed cannot be increased at will, you can set a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and for the counter-spindle (S3), depending on the shape, size, and material of the workpiece or collet. The machine manufacturer only sets one speed limit for the machine, i.e. none that are dependent on the workpiece.


Press the "Program" softkey.

Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

ShopTurn

program Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" softkeys.

Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters with uppercase letters.

-or-

Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.

Set program header parameters


4


Work

offset Select a zero-point offset or input a zero-point offset directly into

the input field or call up the zero-point offset list using the "Work offset" softkey if you want to select a zero-point offset there.

Input the other parameters.

Teach TC

position

Press the "Teach TC position" softkey if you want to set the current position of the tool as a tool change point.

The tool’s coordinates are adopted by the parameters XT and ZT.


The work plan is displayed. ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.

4.3.3 Creating program blocks

After a new program is created and the program header is filled out, define the individual machining steps in program blocks that are necessary for finishing the workpiece.

A large amount of memory is available for one program.

However, depending on the storage space required, you can only program a limited number of blocks.

• ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl) You can program a maximum of 1,000 blocks using the "Straight" function or a maximum of 600 blocks using the "Pocket" function.

• PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced) You can program a maximum of 3,500 blocks using the "Straight" function or a maximum of 2,100 blocks using the "Pocket" function.

You can only create the program blocks between the program header and the program end. The following function groups are available to you for programming:

• Straight/Circle • Drilling • Turning • Contour turning • Milling • Contour milling • Transformations


4


Fill out an individual parameter screen form for each machining step. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters. The parameters tool, feedrate, speed, and machining are explained in the following:

T (Tool)

Each time a workpiece is machined, you must program a tool. Tools are selected by name, and the selection is integrated in all parameter screen forms of the machining cycles (with the exception of the straight line/circle). The tool length offsets become active as soon as the tool is changed. Tool selection is modal for the straight line/circle, i.e. if the same tool is used to perform several machining steps occur in succession, you only have to program one tool for the first straight line/circle.

D (cutting edge)

In the case of tools with several cutting edges, there is a separate set of individual tool offset data for each edge. For these tools, you must select or specify the number of the cutting edge that you would like to use for machining.

Caution

Collisions may occur if you specify the wrong cutting edge number for some tools (e.g. a flat chamfering drill with guide spigot or step drill) and then traverse the tool. Always ensure that you enter the correct cutting edge number.

Radius compensation

ShopTurn automatically takes the tool radius compensation into account during all machining cycles, with the exception of track milling and straight. For track milling and straight lines, you have the option of programming the machining with or without radius compensation. The tool radius compensation is modal for straight lines, i.e. you have to deselect the radius compensation if you want to traverse without radius compensation.

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

Radius compensation remains as previously set


4


F (feedrate)

The feedrate F (also referred to as the machining feedrate) specifies the speed at which the axes move during machining of the workpiece. The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth. The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted when switching from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa. It is only possible to enter the feedrate in mm/tooth during milling; this ensures that each cutting edge of the milling cutter is cutting under the best possible conditions. The feedrate per tooth corresponds to the linear path traversed by the milling cutter when a tooth is engaged. For milling and turning cycles, the feedrate during roughing is relative to the milling or cutting center point. This is also applies to finishing, with the exception of contours with inner curves. In this case, the feedrate is relative to the contact point between the tool and the workpiece. The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

S (spindle speed)

The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle revolutions per minute (rpm) and is programmed along with a tool. The speed specified relates to the main spindle (S1) or counter-spindle (S3) during turning machining and axial drilling, and to the tool spindle (S2) during drilling and milling machining. The spindle starts immediately after the tool change. The spindle stops upon reset, program end, or a tool change. The spindle's direction of rotation is specified in the tool list for each tool.

As an alternative to the spindle speed, you can also program the cutting speed. During the milling cycles, the spindle speed is automatically recalculated into the cutting speed and vice versa.

V (cutting speed)

The cutting speed V is a circumferential speed (m/min) and is programmed together with a tool, as an alternative to the spindle speed. The cutting speed is relative to the main spindle (V1) or the counter-spindle (V3) for turning machining and axial drilling, and corresponds to the circumferential speed of the workpiece at the point that is currently being machined. For drilling and milling machining, meanwhile, the cutting speed is relative to the tool spindle (V2) and corresponds to the circumferential speed at which the cutting edge of the tool machines the workpiece.


4


Machining

You can choose between roughing, finishing, or complete machining for the machining of some cycles. For certain milling cycles, finishing edge or finishing bottom are possible. • Roughing

One or more machinings with depth setting • Finishing

One-time machining • Finishing edge

Only the edge of the object is finished • Finishing bottom

Only the bottom of the object is finished

• Complete machining Roughing and finishing with a tool in a machining step

If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you must call the machining cycle twice (1st block = roughing; 2nd block = finishing).The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time.

Position the cursor in the work plan on the line behind which a

new program block is to be inserted.

Using the softkeys, select the desired function (see following section).

The corresponding parameter screen form is displayed.

Enter the values for the individual parameters.

Press the "Help" key if you want to see the help screen, which explains the individual parameters.

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey if you want to select a tool from the tool

list for parameter "T".

-and- Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and- To

program Press the "To program" softkey.

The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.


The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.


4


4.3.4 Changing program blocks

You can later optimize the parameters in the programmed ShopTurn blocks or adapt them to new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the feedrate or shift a position. In this case, you can change all the parameters in every program block directly in the associated parameter screen form.



Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to open.

-or-


All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Select the program that you want to change.

-or-


The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Place the cursor on the desired program block in the machining plan.


The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.

Make the desired changes.

-or-

Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.

The changes are accepted in the program.


4


4.3.5 Program editor

You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence of program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

The following functions are available in the program editor:

• Select You can select several program blocks simultaneously, for example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.

• Copy/paste You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. However, the program blocks remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in somewhere else.

• Search You can search for a specific block number or any character string in a program.

• Rename You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have copied the contour.

• Numbering When you insert a new or copied program block between two existing program blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new block number. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. With the "Numbering" function, you can renumber the program blocks in ascending order.


4


Opening the program editor

Select a program.


The softkeys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical softkey bar.

Selecting a program block

Place the cursor in the machining plan on the first or last block you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.

The program blocks are marked.

Copying a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.

The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.

Cutting a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey.

The program blocks are removed from the machining plan and stored in buffer memory.

Pasting a program block

Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the machining plan.

Place the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is (are) to be inserted.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The program blocks are inserted in the machining plan of the program.


4


Search

Search

> Press the "Search" softkey.

Enter a block number or text.

Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search


ShopTurn searches throughout the program. The cursor highlights the search hit.

Continue

search Press the "Continue search" softkey to continue the search, as

necessary.

Renaming a contour

Place the cursor on a contour in the machining plan.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.

Enter a new name for the contour.


The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the machining plan.

Numbering program blocks

Renumber

Press the "Renumber" softkey.

The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.

Closing the program editor

Press the "Back" softkey to close the program editor.


4


4.3.6 Specifying a quantity

If you want to finish a certain number of the same kind of workpiece, you can input the desired quantity at the program end. When you start the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many times as you specified.

If your machine has a bar loader, you can program the reloading of

the workpiece and then the actual machining at the beginning of the program. Finally, remove the finished workpiece and enter the desired quantity at the program end.

In this way, workpiece finishing can take place fully automatically.

Open the "Program end" block, if you want to machine more than one workpiece.

Enter the number of workpieces that you want to machine.


When you later start the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many times as you specified.

Endless

If you want to repeat the program execution an unlimited number of times, press the "Endless" softkey. You can abort the program execution with "Reset."

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions 5


ShopTurn functions 5.1 Straight or circular path movements ....................................................................... 5-151

5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane ..................................................................... 5-152 5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-154 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-156 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-157 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-159 5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-160 5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-162

5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-163 5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-164 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-167 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-169 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-171 5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-173 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-175 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-176 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-178 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-179 5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-182 5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-184 5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-186 5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-188 5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-189

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-193 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-196 5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-197 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-199 5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-203 5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-204

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-206 5.4.1 Representation of the contour................................................................................. 5-208 5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-210 5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-211 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-216 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-218 5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material.......................................................................... 5-222 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-224 5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-226 5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-227 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-229

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5


5.5 Milling ......................................................................................................................5-231 5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-232 5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-236 5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-240 5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-244 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-247 5.5.6 Circumferential slot..................................................................................................5-250 5.5.7 Open slot .................................................................................................................5-253 5.5.8 Positions..................................................................................................................5-259 5.5.9 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-259 5.5.10 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-261

5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-268 5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-271 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-273 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-275 5.6.4 Changing a contour .................................................................................................5-282 5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-284 5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-289 5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing) .........................................................................5-293 5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket.................................................5-296 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-298 5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-302 5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing) ..........................................................................5-303 5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot..................................................5-306 5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot .......................................................................................5-308 5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-311

5.7 Calling a subroutine.................................................................................................5-313

5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-315

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle ..........................................................................5-316

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-322

5.11 Calling zero offsets..................................................................................................5-323

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-324

5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ...........................................................5-326

5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-328

5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-330 5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-330 5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern.....................................................................................5-331 5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-332

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5


5.1 Straight or circular path movements When you want to perform straight or circular path movements or

machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.

To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:

• Specify the tool and the spindle speed • Select the machining plane • Program the machining • Program any further machining

The following machining options are available: • Straight • Circle with known center point • Circle with known radius • Line with polar coordinates • Circle with polar coordinates

If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you must define the pole first.

Caution If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.1 Straight or circular path movements

5


5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane

Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.

If you program a sequence of different straight or circular path

motions, the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane remain active until you change them again.

If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the coordinates of the programmed path motion are adjusted automatically to the new machining plane. The originally programmed coordinates remain unchanged only for a straight motion (right-angled, not polar).

Tool

>

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" softkeys.

Enter a tool in parameter field "T".

-or-

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey and select a tool from the tool list.

-and-

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

To


The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.

Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several cutting edges.

In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).

Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.


5


Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate, End face/End face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, End face Y or Peripheral surface Y).

Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.

-or-

Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you selected machining plane End face Y.

-or-

Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface Y.

Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or whether there should be no change (input field left blank).


The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.


5


5.1.2 Straight line

When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates, you can use the "Straight" function.

The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or

at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius compensation acts modally; therefore, you must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. If several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius

compensation First straight line with deactivated radius compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.


5


Straight

>

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" softkeys.

Rapid

traverse Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid

traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.


X Z Y C1 C3 Z3

Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of special axis (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm mm mm

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:




The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used


5


5.1.3 Circle with known center point

To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the

programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered interpolation parameter settings I and K.

Circle center

point >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" softkeys.


Direction of rotation

Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

X Y I J

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Y I J

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm


5


Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Z I K

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc). The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm


5.1.4 Circle with known radius

To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.

The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its

current position to the programmed target position at the machining feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by ShopTurn.

You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two options for approaching the target position from the current position via an arc of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.

+

–

Target

Start

Arc angles of up to 180°: +

Arc angles larger than 180°: –

Arcs with different arc angles


5


Circle

radius >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" softkeys.






X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Y

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

R Radius of arc The sign determines the type of arc traversed.

mm



5


5.1.5 Polar coordinates

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions as polar coordinates.

Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate system.

Polar

>

Pole >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" softkeys.


X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: X position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Y

Machining plane End face Y: X position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: X position of the pole ∅ (abs) or X position of the pole (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm


5


5.1.6 Straight polar

When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you can use the "Straight polar" function.

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L

and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse. The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius compensation

First straight line with deactivated radius compensation


5


If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Polar

> Straight

polar >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" softkeys.

Rapid

traverse Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid

traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.


L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs or inc) The sign specifies the direction.

Degrees


Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:




The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used


5


5.1.7 Circle polar

If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can use the "Circle polar" function.

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The

angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate. The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point positions are at the same distance from the pole. The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Polar

> Circle

polar >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" softkeys.






α Polar angle (abs or inc) The sign specifies the direction.

Degrees


5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.2 Drilling

5

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition 5-163

5.2 Drilling The functions explained in this section are used when you want to

program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

You program drilling operations in the order in which they are

performed. The following technology cycles can be used: • Drilling centered • Thread centered • Centering • Drilling • Reaming • Deep hole drilling • Tapping • Thread milling

You have to program the positions or position pattern after the technology cycles.

All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Drilling

Clamping a spindle With off-center drilling, it can be helpful to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.


If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains activated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.2 Drilling

5

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. 5-164 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 Edition

5.2.1 Centered drilling

The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center of the end face.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal. During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates. You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.

Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.

3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Stock removal


2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the 1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the control system.

3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock removal.



If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle speed under "Straight/Circle" "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.


5


Drilling

centric >

Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" softkeys.

Break

chips -or- Solid

machin. Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." softkey.


T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value programmed for Z1.


Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank. (abs. or inc.)

mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth. Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s rev

XD Center offset in X direction The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not suitable. The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.

mm


5


5.2.2 Thread centered

The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand thread in the center of the end face.

During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.

You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate override is not operative.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the final drilling depth Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking


2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling

depth Z1 is reached. 5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool

retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.


5


The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for centered tapping in a machine data code.


Thread

centric >

Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" softkeys.



P Thread pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.


Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm

D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm

5.2.3 Drilling and reaming

The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.

Centering

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate F until it reaches the depth or diameter.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Drilling

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Reaming

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed feedrate to the safety clearance.


5


Drilling

reaming >

Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" softkeys.

Centering

-or- Drilling

-or- Reaming

Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" softkey.



FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Diameter Shank Tip

The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for centering). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1 (only for centering and drilling).

∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm

Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s rev


5


5.2.4 Deep hole drilling

The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance.

Chipbreaking


2. The tool is retracted by retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking and drills up to the next infeed depth.



Stock removal


2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety distance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.

3. Following this, drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth and the tool is then retracted again.

4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed end drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.


Deep hole

drilling >

Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" softkeys.


5






Stock removal Chipbreaking

The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed depth 1.

Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth. Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.

mm

V3 Limit distance (for stock removal only) Distance to last infeed depth that the drill approaches at rapid traverse after stock removal. Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s rev


5


5.2.5 Tapping

The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal thread on the end face or peripheral surface.

The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during

tapping. The feedrate override has no effect during this process.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety distance. While the spindle is stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the retraction plane and then to the safety distance. At this point, the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and feedrate are synchronized. The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed position.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety distance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal


2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. Then the tool enters the workpiece again at spindle speed SR and feedrate VR to the 1st infeed depth with an anticipation point of 1 mm. The spindle speed changes to S and the feedrate to V, and the tool then drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking


2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling

depth X1 or Z1 is reached. 5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool

retracts to the safety distance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.


5


The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for tapping in a machine data element.


Thread

>

Tapping

Press the "Drilling", "Thread", and "Tapping" softkeys.


T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

P Thread pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

MODULE: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear wheel.

Filets/" : Used with pipe threads, for example. For values entered in turns/", enter the integer in front of the decimal point in the first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the second and third field.

For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:


SR Spindle speed for retraction rev/min

VR Cutting rate for retraction (alternative to SR) m/min



1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm


5


D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm

5.2.6 Thread milling

The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal or external thread on the end face.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a

value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K parameter. You can change this value. The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.


The entered feedrate refers to the machining. However the feedrate of the cutter center point is displayed. That is why a smaller value is displayed for internal threads and a larger value is displayed for external threads than was entered.

You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread. Internal thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on

the return plane, and then to the safety clearance. 2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and

then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

External thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.



5


Thread

> Thread

drilling

Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Thread drilling" softkeys.



Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Roughing

Finishing

Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also changes the machining direction (climb/conventional). Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0 (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0 (only for peripheral surface Y) X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for peripheral surface Y)

Internal thread External thread


Left-hand thread Right-hand thread

Left-hand thread Right-hand thread

NT Number of teeth in a milling insert. Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position is reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.

Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) mm

X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface Y) mm

∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm

P Thread pitch If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool.



5


K Thread depth mm

DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for peripheral surface Y) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm

α0 Start angle Degrees

5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns

The drilling positions must be programmed after you have programmed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).

The following position patterns are available:

• Freely programmable positions • Positioning on a line, matrix, or box • Position on a full or pitch circle

You can program several position patterns in succession (up to 20 technologies and position patterns together). They are traversed in the order in which you program them. The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed positions are automatically chained by the control.

Sequence of execution 1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses all programmed positions. Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point. In the case of a matrix, machining is performed first in the direction of the 1st axis and then back and forth. The box and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.

2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second tool in the program.

3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has been executed at all of the programmed positions.

Tool traverse path Within a position pattern, or while approaching the next position pattern, the tool is retracted to the safety distance and the new position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.

Including/skipping positions

You can include or skip any positions (see chapter titled "Including and skipping positions").


5


5.2.8 Freely programmable positions

You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.

ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which

you enter them.

In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely programmable positions" function again.

Positions

>

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable Positions" softkeys.

Delete all

Press the "Delete all" softkey if you want to delete all the

programmed positions.



Cartesian/ polar Cartesian/ cylindrical

Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C)

mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0

X1 ... X7 Y1 ...Y7

End face/end face C and end face Y - Cartesian: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) X coordinate for first position (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.)

X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees mm mm

mm mm


5


Z0 CP C0 L0

C1...C7 L1...L7

End face/end face C and end face Y - Polar: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance to position (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees Degrees mm

Degrees mm

X0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cartesian: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm

mm mm

C0 Z0

C1...C7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cylindrical C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

Degrees mm

Degrees mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees mm mm

mm mm


5


5.2.9 Line position pattern

The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on a line.

Positions

>

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.

Select the “Line” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.



Z0 X0 Y0 α0

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm mm mm Degrees

X0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm mm mm Degrees

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees


5


X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.


L Position spacing mm

N Number of positions

5.2.10 Matrix position pattern

The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines. If you want to program a rhombus-shaped matrix, enter the angle αX or αY.

Positions

>


Select the “Matrix” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.




5


Z0 X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees mm mm

X0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction



5


Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees mm mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction



5


5.2.11 Box position pattern

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced at an equal distance along on a box. The spacing may be different on both axes. If you want to program a rhombus-shaped box, enter the angle αX or αY.

Positions

>


Select the “Box” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.



Z0 X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction



5


X0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees

mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees

mm mm


5


X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction


5.2.12 Full circle position pattern

The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.

ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual

positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the same.

You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential groove, a collision may result.

Approach next positionon a straight line

Approach next positionin a circle

Approach positions on a linear or circular path


5


Positions

>

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Select the “Full circle” position pattern in the "Full/Pitch Circle” parameter field.



centered off-center Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle

mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm mm Degrees

centered off-center Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Positioning

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm Degrees mm


5


X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 R Positioning

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm

N Number of positions on full circle

5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern

The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.

You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position

along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see Section "Full circle position pattern").

Positions

>


Select the “Pitch Circle" position sample in the “Full/Pitch Circle” parameter field.




5


centered off-center

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face

Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius

mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm mm Degrees

centered off-center

Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Positioning

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face. Position full circle off-center on the end face.

Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 R Positioning

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm

α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are approached at this angle. Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.

Degrees

N Number of positions on pitch circle


5


5.2.14 Including and skipping positions

You can skip any positions in the following position patterns:

• Position pattern line • Position pattern matrix • Position pattern box • Full circle position pattern • Pitch circle position pattern The suppressed positions are skipped during machining.

Including/skipping any

positions

Positions

>

Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

or

Press the "Line/Matrix/Box" or "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Skip pos.

> Press the "Skip pos." softkey.

The "Skip positions" window opens on top of the input form of the position pattern.

The number of the current position is displayed along with its status (on/off) and its coordinates (X, Y). The current position is highlighted by a circle.

Enter the number of the point you want to skip in the "Position" field (in accordance with the machining sequence).

- OR - Position

+

Press the "Position +" softkey to select the next position (in the machining direction).

- OR - Position

- Press the "Position -" softkey to select the previous position

(opposite direction to the machining direction).

Press the "Alternat." softkey to include or skip the current position.

The skipped positions are indicated by an enabled cross in the graphic.


5


Including or skipping all positions at once

Skip all

Press the "Skip all" softkey to skip all positions.

Include all

Press the "Include all" softkey to include all positions again.

5.2.15 Repeating positions

If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".

ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern

and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.

Position pattern 001

Repeat positionpattern 001

Repeat position pattern

Repeat

position >

Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" softkeys.

Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.3 Turning

5


5.3 Turning If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a

position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.

5.3.1 Roughing cycles

The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).

Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the finishing allowance that has been programmed. If no finishing allowance has been programmed, the workpiece is roughed down to the final contour.

During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.

The angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge determines whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the infeed depth D, in order to remove residual corners, or is raised immediately. The angle beyond which rounding is performed is stored in a machine data element.


If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised by the safety distance or a value specified in the machine data at rapid traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the contour to be damaged.


5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.3 Turning

5


Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius compensation during finishing.

Longitudinal stock removal from external contour

Paraxial roughing

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed by the safety distance.

2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse. 3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate. 4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at

rapid traverse (see "Roughing"). 5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next

infeed depth. 6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate. 7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached. 8. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Stock

removal >

Press the "Turning" and "Stock removal" softkeys.

Select one of the three stock removal cycles via the softkeys: Simple stock removal cycle straight line -or- Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers -or- Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers


5





Roughing

Finishing

Position Stock removal position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

Außen Innen

Z

X

parallel zur X-Achse (Plan)parallel zur Z-Achse (Längs)

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Stirnseite

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Rückseite

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Face Rear

parallel to X axis (plane)



X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm

Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm

Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm

Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs) or intermediate point (inc) mm

Zm Intermediate point (abs or inc) mm

α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degrees

α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degrees


5


5.3.2 Recessing cycles

Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.

Z

X

Inclined recess

You can machine outer or inner recesses in the longitudinal or transverse directions. Use the "Recess width" and "Recess depth" parameters to determine the shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess. You can specify a finishing allowance for the recess base and the flanks; roughing is then performed down to this point. The dwell time between recessing and retraction is stored in a machine data element.


Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)

D

D

Safety clearance (1)

(3)

(2)(5)

(4)

(7) (6) (8)

D D + safety clearance

D + safety clearance

Machining steps in recessing

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed by the safety distance.

2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1). 3. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth

2D (2). 5. The tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse.


5


6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the infeed depth 2D, until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4). Between the individual recesses, the tool moves back by D + safety distance at rapid traverse. After the last recess, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety distance.

7. All subsequent recess cuts are made alternately and directly down to the final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recesses, the tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Finishing 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed

by the safety distance. 2. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down one flank and then

along the bottom to the center. 3. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down the other flank and

then along the bottom to the center. 5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Recess

>

Press the "Turning" and "Recess" softkeys.

Select one of the three recess cycles with the softkey: Simple recessing cycle -or- Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers -or- Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers


5





Roughing

Finishing

+ Complete machining

Position Recess position:

Reference point

Reference point:



B1 Recess width, bottom (inc) mm

B2 Recess width, top (inc) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and radii)

mm

T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs or inc) mm

T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs or inc) alternative to T1 – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

mm

α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers) The angles can be between -180 and +180°

Longitudinal recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the Z axis Transverse recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the X axis A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis

Degrees

α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle) Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can be between 0 and < 90°.

Degrees

FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm

R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm

D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc) – (for roughing only) D=0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1 D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D for improved chip clearance and avoidance of tool breakage.

1 2

34

5D

T1D

All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1. The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle. Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one position.

mm

U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm


5


UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)

P Distance between recesses (inc) P is not displayed when N=1

mm

5.3.3 Undercut form E and F

The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed

by the safety distance. 2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting

from the flank through to the cross-feed V. 3. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

Undercut form E

Undercut form F

Undercut

>

Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut

form E -or- Undercut

form F Press the "Undercut form E" or

"Undercut form F" softkey.


5




Position Position of undercut form E:

Position of undercut form F:

Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table: Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm

X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or allowance in X direction (inc) mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for undercut form F only) mm

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm

5.3.4 Thread undercuts

The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN 76 for workpieces with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed

by the safety distance. 2. The first cut is made at the machining feedrate, starting from the

flank and traveling along the shape of the thread undercut as far as the safety distance.

3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished. 5. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.

Thread undercut


5


Undercut

>

Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut

thread DIN -or- Undercut

thread Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" softkey.




Roughing

Finishing


Position Position of thread undercut:

P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev



X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or Allowance in X direction (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only)

mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

R1,R2 Radius1, Radius2 (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

α Insertion angle Degrees

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm

D Infeed (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm




5


5.3.5 Thread cutting

The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread" functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads with constant or variable pitch.

There may be single or multiple threads.

You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle rotation and the feed direction.

The infeed is performed automatically with a constant infeed depth or constant cutting cross-section.

• With a constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases from cut to cut. The finishing allowance is machined in one cut after roughing. A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at small thread depths.

• With a constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure remains constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is reduced.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K parameter. You can change this value. The default selection must be activated via a machine data element.


The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position measuring system.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse. 2. Thread with advance:

The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread advance W. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the starting position displaced by the thread run-in W2.

3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-out R.

4. Thread with advance: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then to the next starting position. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then back to the starting position.

5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished. 6. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.


5


Thread longitudinal

Thread machining can be stopped at any time thanks to the "Quick-raise" function. It ensures that the tool does not damage the thread when it is raised.

Thread

>

Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Thread

long. -or- Thread

cone

-or- Thread

face

Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" softkey.



P Thread pitch


G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change. G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution. G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution. If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be programmed can be calculated as follows:

|Pe2

- P2 | G = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ [mm/rev2] 2*Z1

The identifiers have the following meanings: Pe End pitch of thread [mm/rev] P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev] Z1 Thread length [mm] A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.


5


Linear: Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only) Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)


Roughing

Finishing




X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm

X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs or inc) – (for conical thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm/degr.

X1 Thread length ∅ (abs) or thread length (inc) – (for face thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z1 Thread length (abs or inc) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

W W2 W2=R

Thread advance (inc) The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread as well. Thread run-in (inc) The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft). Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)

mm mm mm

R Thread run-out (inc) The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).

mm

K Thread depth (inc) If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray background. The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is displayed with a white background again. The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset thread depth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The cycle automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of the specified cut segmentation.

mm

α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank α < 0: Infeed along the front flank α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must not exceed half the flank angle of the tool.

Degrees

I Infeed slope as flank (inc) – alternative to infeed slope as angle I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank I < 0: Infeed along the front flank

mm

Infeed along the flank Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative) Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can infeed along alternate flanks to avoid loading the same tool cutting edge at all times, and thus increase the tool life.


5


α > 0: Start at rear flank α < 0: Start at front flank

AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only) The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of roughing cuts and the first infeed.

mm

U Final machining allowance (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

NN Number of non-cuts (finishing only) To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further NN times.

V Return distance (inc) mm

Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial cut of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (-360°<Q<360°). E.g. Q = 30.0 The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.

Degrees

Multiple thread

The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is fundamentally the same.

Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".

Press the "Alternat." softkey.

Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are displayed.


L Number of threads (max. 6) The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first thread is always placed at 0°.

If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must be entered for Q.

A Thread changeover depth (inc) First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached. A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.

mm

N 1 of L threads N ≠ 0: Only machine thread N N = 0: Machine all threads

P Start thread P = 1 ... L only when N=0 If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.


5


5.3.6 Thread re-machining

The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being cut.

ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs

due to reclamping the workpiece.

Jog

Switch the spindle off.


Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.

Thread

>

Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Sync.

Point Press the "Sync. Point" softkey when the thread cutting tool is

exactly in the thread groove.


Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).


Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point (X0, Z0) can be reached without a collision.

Load the program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.

Start

search run

Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread starts. The angular offset is taken into account.


5


5.3.7 Parting

The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).

You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined

part. You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed S up to a depth X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed. As of depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR or a reduced speed SR, in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller diameter.

Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with parting. With pipes, for example, you do not need to part until you reach the center; parting slightly more than the wall thickness of the pipe is sufficient.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the retraction plane, followed by the safety distance.

2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is created at the machining feedrate.

3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at the machining feedrate. 4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and

reduced speed SR. 5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a workpiece drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the workpiece drawer must be enabled in a machine data element.



5


Parting

>

Press the "Turning" and "Parting" softkeys.



SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rev/min



FS Chamfering, alternative to R mm

R Radius alternative to FS mm

X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc) mm

FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev

SR Reduced speed rev/min

Parts gripper Yes: Extend workpiece drawer No: Do not extend workpiece drawer

XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs) mm

X2 Final depth ∅ (abs) or final depth (inc) mm

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.4 Contour turning

5


5.4 Contour turning The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and

cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You then choose one of the following machining technologies: • Stock removal • Grooving • Plunge-turning

You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the three technologies above.

For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as follows:

1. Enter unmachined-part contour If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter finished-part contour You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing) The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions or parallel to the contour.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the contour again.

5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.4 Contour turning

5


All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Cut a contour

If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.


5


5.4.1 Representation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Icon Description

Starting point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line left Straight line right


Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc Right Arc Left

Circle Circle

Pole

Straight diagonal or circle in polar coordinates

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Description - Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)


5


Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line

graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots and dashes.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.


5


5.4.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

New

contour >

Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.

Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.


The input form for the start point of the contour appears.



Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour elements").


5



X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start

R: Radius as transition element at contour start FS=0 or R=0: No transition element

mm mm

Transition to contour start

Location of transition element relative to contour start point

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

5.4.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Straight vertical line

• Straight horizontal line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

Contour transition elements

As the transition element between two contour elements, you can select a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements, an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen form of the contour element.


5


You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour elements.

The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a transition element to the blank.

Additional commands

You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).

You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:

• Tangent to preceding element You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

• Dialog selection If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Create exact contour

transitions The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.

To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming options (using an additional command or programming a special feedrate for the transition element).

• Additional command For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.


5


G64

G9

Machining direction

Workpiece

Finishing contour edges

• Feedrate for transition element If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition element, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned more accurately.

Creating a contour

element

...

Select a contour element via softkey.

Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).


The contour element is added to the contour.

Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.

All

parameters If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.


5


Tangent to preceding element

When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to

prec. elem. Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select

dialog Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two

different contour options.

The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Close

contour Press the "Close contour" softkey.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Transition element at contour end

When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you transfer the contour to the process plan.

Place the cursor on the last contour element.


The associated input screen form opens.

Enter a transition element.


Place the cursor on the contour end .


The associated input screen form opens.

Choose the position you require for the transition element.


A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.


5


Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

L Length of straight line mm

α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degrees

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degrees

FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev

Transition to next element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to the next contour element

mm mm

Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm

P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev

α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degrees

Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only): Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command


Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm


5


α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degrees

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degrees

β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degrees

β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees

FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev


FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element

mm mm

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command


Parameter Description for end of contour Unit

Transition to contour end

Location of transition element relative to contour end point

5.4.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • appended, • modified, • inserted or • deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.


The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...

Select the required contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.


The required contour element is appended to the contour.


5


Modifying contour element




Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.


The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphics.

Enter the desired changes.


The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

Changing dialog selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change

selection Press the "Change selection" softkey.

The two selection options appear again.

Select



Accept

dialog Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert a contour element




Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

...

Select a new contour element via softkey.



5



The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

Delete contour element




Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete

element Press the "Delete element" softkey.


The selected contour element is deleted.

5.4.5 Stock removal

You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.

Stock removal

Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.

Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part contour.

If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn defines the boundary between blank and finished part.

If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°, the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.


5


Contour finish

Unmachined part

Finished part

α

α > 1: Finish to top

X

Z

α =45°

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top

Contour finish

Unmachined part

Finished part

α

α ≤ 1: Finish to side

X

Z

α = − 45°

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side

Alternating cutting depth

Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and thus increase the tool life.

First cut

Second cut

D

D

D - 10%

D - 10%

Alternating cutting depth

The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine data code.



5


Rounding at the contour

In order to avoid residual corners during roughing, you can enable the "Always round the contour" function. This will remove the protrusions that are always left at the end with each cut (due to the cut geometry).The "Do not round contour" setting accelerates machining of the contour. However, any resulting residual corners will not be recognized or machined. Thus, it is imperative that you check the behavior before machining using the simulation.

When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value. The angle is set in a machine data code.


Cut segmentation

To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for each section.

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected. You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.

Feed interruption

To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the distance after which the feed interruption should occur. The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.


Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created. Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance programmed.

You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance). Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.


5


If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time.If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the machining cycle a corresponding number of times.

Stock

removal Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.




Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑: From inside to outside ↓: From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)


5


U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm



Stock allowance

Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm

BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)

XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm


Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not

FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5.4.6 Stock removal of residual material

The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.

During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically

detects any residual material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

St. remov.

resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "St. remov. resid." softkeys.


5





Roughing

Finishing


Stock removal direction: longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑: From inside to outside ↓: From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.


DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)


mm



Stock allowance


U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm








Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not

FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev


5


5.4.7 Grooving

The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.

Grooving

Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.

If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess.

Blank With grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any blank contour.


If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a feed interruption.

Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.


5


Grooving

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" softkeys.




Roughing

Finishing


Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side


XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm


mm



Stock allowance



mm




mm


mm







N Number of grooves


5


5.4.8 Grooving residual material

The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During grooving, ShopTurn detects automatically any residual material

and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Grooving residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.

Grooving

resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." softkeys.




Roughing

Finishing








mm



Stock allow. Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compens. allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm








N Number of grooves


5


5.4.9 Plunge-turning

The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any shape. In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.

Plunge-turning

You will need a special tool for plunge-turning. Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the contour.

Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined

as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour.


If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a feed interruption.

Machining method You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.


5


Plunge-

turning Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" softkeys.



FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev


Roughing

Finishing








mm



Stock allowance



mm




mm


mm







N Number of grooves


5


5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual

material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.

Plunge-turn.

resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." softkeys.



FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev


Roughing

Finishing








mm



Stock allowance



5



mm








N Number of grooves

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.5 Milling

5


5.5 Milling The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill

simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following geometric shapes are available for milling:

• Rectangular pocket • Circular pocket • Rectangular spigot • Circular spigot • Longitudinal slot • Circumferential slot • Open slot • Multiple edge • Engraving

To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than one position, however, you must program the positions or position pattern in a separate block after the technology block.

The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Milling

Clamping a spindle When milling, it can be useful, for example, during vertical insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.


5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.5 Milling

5


If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automaticallyreleased after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket

The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:

• Milling rectangular pocket from solid material • Pre-drilling a rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example,

the milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after the other).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method selected.

3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected machining method.



5


Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the pocket.

Pocket

> Rectangu-

lar pocket

Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.

If you want to mill a chamfer and the corner radius was R = 0 during finishing, you must specify the radius of the finishing milling tool in parameter R during chamfering.




Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining method

Roughing

Finishing

Edge finishing Chamfering

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).


5


X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm %

mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm %

mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm


5


C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

W Pocket width mm

L Pocket length mm

R Radius at pocket corners mm

α0 Angle of rotation of pocket Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees

Insertion

Insertion strategy Helical: Insertion along helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Oscillating: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth infeed. Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the pocket has been predrilled.

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical insertion) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min


5


5.5.2 Circular pocket

The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining variants are available:

• Milling a circular pocket from solid material • Pre-drilling a circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling, circular pocket and position program blocks one after the other).

For milling with the “circular pocket” function two methods are available, the plane-by-plane method and the helical method.

Plane-by-plane machining In plane-by-plane machining of the pocket, the material is removed horizontally, one layer at a time.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.


3. The pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected machining method.


Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the pocket radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.


• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the pocket.


5


Helical machining In helical machining, the material is removed down to pocket depth in a helical movement.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.

2. Infeed to the first machining diameter. 3. The pocket is machined to pocket depth using the selected

machining method. 4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as follows: • Roughing

During roughing, the pocket is machined downward with helical movements. A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material. The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance. This process is repeated layer by layer, from inside out, until the pocket has been completely machined.

• Finishing During finishing, the edge is first machined down to the base with a helical movement. A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material. The base is milled from outside in, using a spiral movement. The tool is retracted with rapid traverse from the center of the pocket to a safety distance.

• Finishing the edge During finishing the edge, the edge is first machined down to the base with a helical movement. A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material. The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.

Pocket

> Circular

pocket

Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" softkeys.


5






Machining method

Roughing

Finishing

Edge finishing Chamfering (only plane by plane)

Plane-by-plane helical

Machine pocket plane by plane Machine pocket helically


Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Plane by plane: Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Helical: Maximum pitch of the helix Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm/rev mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)

mm Degrees mm mm mm


5


DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm % mm mm mm mm


Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm


Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


∅ Diameter of pocket mm Insertion

Insertion strategy (only for “plane by plane” machining variant) Helical: Insertion in a helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Feedrate: Machining feed Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.


5


EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm


mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min

5.5.3 Rectangular spigot

The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill various rectangular spigots.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius:

Rectangular spigot

In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also specify a blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap anyadjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular spigot" function several times, with a continually decreasing finishing allowance.


5


Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance. The starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane. Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed (up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next machining depth is then executed.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.


X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Rectangularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the rectangular spigot in a semicircle Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular spigot

as follows: • Roughing

Roughing involves moving round the spigot until the programmed finishing allowance has been reached.

• Finishing If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the spigot is moved round until depth Z1 is reached.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the rectangular spigot.


5


Spigot

> Rectangu-

lar spigot

Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" softkeys.





Machining method Roughing

Finishing Chamfering


Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular spigots in a position pattern (full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) – (for chamfer only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm


5


CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs) Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Width of finished-part spigot mm L Length of finished-part spigot mm R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm α0 Angle of rotation of spigot

Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees

W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm


5


5.5.4 Circular spigot

The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular spigot.

In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank

spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance. The starting point is always on the positive X axis.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at the machining feedrate. The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane. Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed (up-cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is removed from the contour in a semicircle; the infeed to the next machining depth is then executed.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.



5


X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Circularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the circular spigot in a semicircle

Spigot

> Circular

spigot

Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" softkeys.








Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm


5


UZ FS ZFS

Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs) Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm ∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm


5


5.5.5 Longitudinal slot

The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:

• Milling a longitudinal slot from solid material. • Pre-drilling a longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across the center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after the other).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.


3. The longitudinal slot is always machined from inside out using the selected machining method.


Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for milling the longitudinal slot: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant that joins the corner radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.


• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the longitudinal slot.


5


Slot

>

Long. slot

Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" softkeys.



Position Select position: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)



Finishing



Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)

mm Degrees mm mm mm


5


DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm % mm mm mm mm mm


Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)



Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)


W Slot width mm

L Slot length mm

α0 Angle of rotation of slot Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees


5


Insertion Insertion strategy

Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center. Oscillating: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot: The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth infeed.

mm

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees


mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min

5.5.6 Circumferential slot

The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch circle.

Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to

machine the circumferential slot: • Roughing:

1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter • Finishing:

1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter • Edge finishing:

Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

Annular slot

To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the "Number N" and "Aperture angle α1" parameters: N = 1 α1 = 360°

Approach/retraction 1. At the height of the retraction plane, the tool approaches the center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot at rapid traverse and adjusts to the safety distance.

2. It is then inserted into the workpiece at the machining feedrate, allowing for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining), X direction infeed (for peripheral machining), and the finishing allowance. Depending on the machining direction (up-cut or synchronism), the circumferential slot is machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.


5


3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or circular path and then machined. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is specified in a machine data element.


5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse. Machining method You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot as

follows: • Roughing

During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after the other from center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot until depth Z1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1 is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.


• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the circumferential slot.

Slot

>

Circ. slot

Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" softkeys.



FZ Depth infeed rate mm/toothmm/min

Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


5




Finishing


Full circle Pitch circle

Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by the control. Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the basis of angle α2.

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY FS ZFS

End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth for the drill tip (abs or inc) – (only for chamfer)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY FS ZFS

End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm


5


C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs) Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Slot width mm

R Radius of circumferential slot mm

α0 Start angle α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis

Degrees

α1 Angle of aperture of a slot Degrees

α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees

N Number of slots

Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

5.5.7 Open slot

Use the "Open slot" function if you want to machine open slots.

You can choose between the following machining strategies, depending on your workpiece and machine properties.

• Vortex milling

• Plunge cutting

Vortex milling

Particularly where hardened materials are concerned, this process is used for roughing and contour preparation with coated VHM milling cutters. Vortex milling is the preferred technique for HSC roughing, as it ensures that the tool is never completely inserted. This means that the level of overlap set is adhered to exactly.

Supplementary conditions for vortex milling

• Roughing 1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Finishing 1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Edge finishing Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Slot width At least 1.15 x milling cutter diameter + finishing allowance Maximum 2 x milling cutter diameter + 2 x finishing allowance


5


• Radial infeed At least 0.02 x milling cutter diameter Maximum 0.25 x milling cutter diameter

• Maximum infeed depth ≤ section height of milling cutter

Please note that the section height of the milling cutter cannot be tested. The maximum radial infeed depends on the milling cutter. For hard materials, use a smaller infeed.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point in front of the slot at rapid traverse and remains at the safety distance.

2. The tool adjusts to the cutting depth. 3. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the

selected machining method. 4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for machining open slots: • Roughing

To perform roughing, the milling cutter executes circular movements. While in motion, the milling cutter is continuously fed more and more in the plane. If the milling cutter has traveled through the entire slot, it returns to its starting point, while continuing to move in a circular fashion. By doing this, it removes the next layer (infeed depth) in the Z direction. This process is repeated until the set slot depth plus the finishing allowance has been achieved.

• Finishing When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls. In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the slot.


• Base finishing When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion across the finished slot and back again.

• Rough finishing If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.

• Chamfering Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.

Plunge cutting Plunge cutting is the preferred method of machining pockets and slots for "unstable" machines and workpiece geometries.


5


This method generally only exerts forces along the tool axis, i.e. perpendicular to the surface of the pocket/slot to be machined (with XY plane in Z direction). For this reason, the tool is subject to virtually no deformation. Thanks to the axial loading of the tool, there is hardly any danger of vibrations affecting unstable work pieces. The depth of cut can be increased considerably. The plunge cutter, as it is known, ensures a longer service life due to fewer vibrations occurring with longer collar lengths.

Supplementary conditions for plunge cutting

• Maximum radial infeed The maximum infeed is dependent on the width of the milling cutter’s cutting edge.

• Increment The lateral increment is calculated on the basis of the required slot width, milling cutter diameter, and finishing allowance.

• Returning Returning involves the milling cutter being retracted at a 45° angle following insertion, if the wrap angle is less than 180°. Otherwise, retraction is vertical, as is the case with drilling.

• Retraction Retraction is performed perpendicular to the wrapped surface.

• Safety distance The milling cutter motion travels beyond the end of the workpiece, along the length of the safety distance, to prevent rounding of the slot walls at the ends.

Please note that the milling cutter’s cutting edge cannot be checked for the maximum radial infeed.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves at rapid traverse to the start point in front of the slot and stops at the safety distance.

2. The open slot is always machined along its entire length, using the selected machining method.


Machining method You can select any of the following machining methods for machining open slots:

• Roughing Roughing of the slot takes place sequentially along the length of the slot, with the milling cutter performing vertical insertions at the machining feedrate. The milling cutter is then retracted and repositioned at the next insertion point. The milling cutter moves along the length of the groove, at half the infeed rate, and inserts alternately at the left-hand and right-hand wall. The first insertion takes place at the groove edge, with the milling cutter inserted at half the infeed, less the safety clearance


5


If the safety distance is greater than the infeed, this will take place on the outside. For this cycle, the maximum width of the slot must be less than double the width of the milling cutter, plus the finishing allowance. Following each insertion, the milling cutter is lifted by the height of the safety clearance at the machining feedrate. As far as possible, this occurs during what is known as the retraction process, i.e. if the milling cutter's wrap angle is less than 180°, it is lifted at a 45° angle from the base in the opposite direction to the bisector of the wrap area. The milling cutter then travels rapidly along the material.

• Finishing When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls. In order to do this, it is once again fed in the Z direction, unit by unit. During this process, the milling cutter travels along the safety distance beyond the beginning and end of the slot, so that it can guarantee an even slot wall surface across the entire length of the slot.


• Base finishing When finishing the base, the milling cutter executes one motion across the finished slot and back again.

• Rough finishing If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted corners are removed to the finishing dimension level.

• Chamfering Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the slot.

Slot

>

Open slot

Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Open slot" softkeys.



Position You can select 4 different positions: • Face/Face C • Peripheral/Peripheral C • End face Y (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)



5


Machining method

Roughing

Finishing

Rough-finishing

Edge finishing

Base finishing Chamfering

Machining strategy

Vortex milling: The milling cutter performs circular motions along the length of the slot and back again. Plunge cutting: Sequential vertical insertions with drilling motions along the length of the tool axis.

Milling direction

Down – for vortex milling Up – for vortex milling Up + down (alternately) – for vortex milling (roughing only)

Single position Pos. pattern

Machine slot the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Machine several slots in a position pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 Z0 Z1 DXY

DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the slot.

Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for roughing only Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, edge finishing or chamfering Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only

mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the slot. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth of slot in relation to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for roughing only Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or chamfering

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm


5


FS XFS

Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only

mm mm


Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the slot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot in relation to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – not for roughing Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or chamfering Chamfer width (inc) – not for chamfering Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – not for chamfering


C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS XFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the slot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Depth of slot in relation to X0 (abs. or inc.) – not for chamfering Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – for roughing only Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – not for roughing (for plunge cutting only), base finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) – not for finishing, edge finishing or chamfering Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – not for finishing, base finishing or chamfering Chamfer width (inc) – for chamfering only Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – for chamfering only


W Slot width mm

L Slot length mm

α0 Angle of rotation of slot Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees


5


5.5.8 Positions

If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than oneposition, you must program a separate positioning block.

You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at

more than one position.

Position pattern

You will find further information about freely definable positions or position patterns in the Section "Drilling".

Positions

>

Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

...

Select the required position pattern via softkey.

Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".

5.5.9 Multiple edge

The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple edge with any number of edges on the end face.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius or chamfer:

Multiple edge

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.

2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining feed. The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth, followed by the movement in the plane. The multiple edge is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.


5


3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.


A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated helically; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined separately.

Y

X

Retractingcontour

Approachingcontour

Tool

Multipleedge

Approaching and retraction from the multiple edge in a quadrant

Multiple

edge >

Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" softkeys.



Position You can select 3 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)


5


Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Finishing


∅ Diameter of blank part mm


N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)

SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm

L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm

α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction. α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.

Degrees

FS1 Chamfer in XY plane (alternative to R1) – (3 edges or more)

R1 Rounding in XY plane (alternative to FS1) – (3 edges or more) mm

Z1 End point Z1 (abs or inc) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

FS Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) mm

ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

UZ Finishing allowance in depth – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

UXY Finishing allowance in the plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

5.5.10 Engraving

The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a line or arc. You can enter the text directly in the text field as "fixed text" or assign it via a variable as "variable text".

ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the

individual characters varies.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.

2. The tool traverses at infeed FZ or FX to machining depth Z1 and X1 and mills the character.

3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and moves along a straight line to the next character.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.


5


Variable texts There are various ways of defining variable text: • Date and time

You can engrave workpieces with the production date and current time of day, for example. The values for date and time are read from the NCK.

• Workpiece count Using the workpiece variables you can assign a consecutive number to the workpieces. You can define the format (number of digits, leading zeroes). The “workpiece count” variable is defined as a user variable (_E_PART[0]) in the GUD 7 data block. The place holder (#) is used to format the number of digits at which the workpiece counts output will begin.

If you output the workpiece count 1 for the first workpiece, you can specify an additive value (e.g. <#,_E_PART[0] + 100>). The workpiece count output is then incremented by this value (e.g. 101, 102, 103,...).

• Numbers When outputting number (e.g. measurement results), you can select the output format (digits either side of the point) of the number to be engraved.

• Text Instead of entering a fixed text in the engraving text field, you can specify the text to be engraved via a text variable (e.g. VARTEXT=“ABC123“).

Mirror writing

Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate transformations") and then the "Engraving" function. At the counterspindle (where mirroring in Z is essentially active), it behaves in the opposite manner. In this case, you need to program additional mirroring for “Front end face” or “External peripheral surface” in order to obtain normal text. When machining a front face, mirroring is typically in X or Y, whereas it is typically in Y or Z when machining a peripheral surface. Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane, see "Selecting the tool and the machining plane".) To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral surface outer" or “End face rear" and “Peripheral surface inner” machining planes on the counterspindle, first program mirroring and then enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.


5


Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes the characters evenly around the full circle.

Engraving

Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" softkeys.

Lowercase letters

Lowercase

Press the "Lowercase" softkey to enter lowercase letters. Press it again to enter uppercase letters.

Special characters Special

characters Press the "Special characters" softkey if you need a character that

does not appear on the input keys.

The "Special characters" window appears.

Place the cursor on the character you require.


The desired character will be inserted in the text.

The “Special characters” softkey is not available in all languages.

Entering a date

Variable >

Date

Press the "Variable" and "Date" softkeys if you want to engrave the current date.

The data is inserted in the European date format (<DD>.<MM>.<YYYY>).

To obtain a different date format, you must adapt the format specified in the text field. For example, to engrave the date in the American dateformat (month/day/year => 8/16/04), change the format to <M>/<D>/<YY> .

Entering a time

Variable >

Time

Press the "Variable" and "Time" softkeys if you want to engrave the current time.

The time is inserted in the European format (<TIME24>).

To have the time in the American format, change the format to <TIME12>.


5


Example: Text entry: Time: <TIME24> Execution: Time: 16.35 Time: <TIME12> Time: 04.35 PM

Entering workpiece

counts

Variable >

Workpc. ct.

000123

Press the "Variable" and "Workpc. ct. 000123" softkeys to engrave a workpiece count with a fixed number of digits and leading zeroes.

The format text <######,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place holders (#) in the engraving field.

If the specified number of digits (e.g. ## ) is not enough to display the workpiece count, ShopTurn will increase the number digits automatically.

- OR -

Variable >

Workpiece

ct.123 Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece ct. 123" softkeys if you want

to engrave a workpiece count without lead zeroes.

The format text <#,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

If the specified number of digits is not enough to display the workpiece count (e.g. 123), ShopTurn will increase the number digits automatically.

You can enter an additive value, for example, if you want to resume production of workpieces after an interruption. The workpiece count output is then increased by this value.

Entering a variable number

Variable >

Number

123.456 Press the "Variable" and "Number 123.456" softkeys if you want to

engrave a any number in a certain format.

The format text <#.###,_VAR_NUM> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

The placeholders #.### define the digit format in which the number defined in VARNUM will be engraved.

For example, if you have stored 12.35 in VARNUM, you can format the variable as follows.


5


Entry Edition Description <#,_VAR_NUM> 12 Integer digits not formatted,

no fractional digits <####,_VAR_NUM> 0012 4 integer digits, leading

zeroes, no fractional digits <#,_VAR_NUM> 12 4 integer digits, leading

zeroes, no fractional digits <#.,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer and fractional digits

not formatted. <#.#,_VAR_NUM> 12.4 Integer digits not formatted,

1 fractional digit (rounded) <#.##,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer digits not formatted,

2 fractional digits (rounded) <#.####,_VAR_NUM> 12.3500 Integer digits not formatted,

4 fractional digits (rounded) If there is insufficient space in front of the decimal point to display the

number entered, it is automatically extended. If the specified number of digits is larger than the number to be engraved, the output format is automatically filled with the appropriate number of leading and trailing zeroes. Instead of the decimal point you can also use a blank.

Instead of VARNUM you can use any other numeric variable (e.g. R0).

Entering a variable text

Variable >

Variable

text Press the "Variable" and "Variable text" softkeys if you want to

take the text to be engraved (up to 200 characters) from a variable.

The format text <Text, VARTEXT> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

You can use any other text variable instead of VARTEXT. Deleting text

Delete text

Press the "Delete text" softkey to remove the entire text.


5


The format text for the variables is always inserted at the current cursor position.

The "Lowercase", "Special characters", "Variable", and "Delete text" softkeys only appear when you place the cursor in the input field for engraving text.


T, D, F, S, V See Sec. "Creating program blocks".

Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Alignment Align text to line

Align text to arc

Align text to arc

Reference point

Position of reference point within text

Engraving text maximum 91 characters

X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1 FZ W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

End face/End face C: Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees

Y0 C0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only) Reference point on longitud. polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignm. only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignm. only) Reference point in X direction (abs) Machining depth (inc.)

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm


5


FX W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM CM ZM

Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees mm

CP X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1 FZ W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

End face Y: Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees

C0 Y0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1 FX W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM ZM

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in X direction (abs) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.6 Contour milling

5


5.6 Contour milling The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple

and complex contours. You can define open contours or closed contours (pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path milling or milling cycles.

A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two

and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the contour before you program the technology. You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling, stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.

Freely-definable contours

The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour You build up the contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Path milling (roughing) The contour is machined taking into account various approach and retract strategies.

3. Path milling (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

4. Path milling (chamfer) If you have planned edge breaking, chamfer the workpiece with a special tool.

Contours for pockets or

islands

Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.6 Contour milling

5


The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour for the pocket You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter contour for the island You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the pocket.

3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill hole first to prevent the drill slipping.

4. Predrill contour pocket If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the pocket.

5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing) The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island taking into account various insertion strategies.

6. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete pocket again.

7. Finish contour pocket with island (finish edge/base) If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge/base when you programmed roughing, the pocket edge/base will be machined again.

All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are shown in the machining plan in square brackets.

Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket


5


Contours for spigots

Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which can also overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a blank contour and all others as spigots.

The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter the blank contour i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

2. Enter contour for the spigot You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.

3. Clear contour spigot (roughing) The contour spigot is cleared.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete spigot again.

5. Finish contour spigot (edge/base finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot edge/base is machined again.

6. Chamfer contour spigot If you have planned edge breaking, subsequently chamfer the workpiece.

Clamping a spindle When milling contours, it can be useful, for example, during vertical

insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.


If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, the clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.


5


5.6.1 Representation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Icon Description

Starting point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down


Straight line left Straight line right


Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc right Arc left

Circle Circle

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Description - Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)


5


Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.


5


5.6.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.

The contours are stored at the end of the program.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point. ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

Contour

milling > New

contour >

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" softkeys.

Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.


The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.

Cartesian starting point Select the machining plane.

Enter the starting point for the contour.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.


5




Polar starting point Select the machining plane.

Pole

Press the "Pole" softkey.

Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.

Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.




Position Select from 4 different positions: • Face/Face C • Peripheral/Peripheral C • End face Y (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)

X Y

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: Start point in X direction (abs.) Start point in Y direction (abs.)

mm mm

X Y L1 ϕ1

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: Pole position in X direction (abs.) Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degrees

∅ Y Yα Z

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: Cylinder surface Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm Degrees mm

∅ Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Polar: Cylinder surface Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm mm Degrees


5


Y Z

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: Start point in Y direction (abs.) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm

Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface Y - Polar: Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degrees

Additional command


5.6.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Straight horizontal line

• Straight vertical line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates. If you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate the polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no need to define another pole.

Parameter input Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.


5


Machining direction In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether the contour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see the following table).

Outside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Synchronism Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Inside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Synchronism Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Contour transition

elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen form of the contour element.

You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour elements.

That means that for a closed counter, you can also program a transition element from the last to the first element of the contour. The contour starting point is outside the contour after you have programmed the transition.

Additional commands

For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in G code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for the circle contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).

You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.


5


Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour: • Tangent to preceding element

You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

• Dialog selection If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Creating a contour

element

...

Select a contour element via softkey.

Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).


The contour element is added to the contour.

Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.

All

parameters If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

Defining a pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.

Continue

Pole

Press the "Continue" and "Pole" softkeys.

Enter the coordinates of the pole.


The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and "Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/Arc contour elements.


5


Tangent to preceding element

When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to

prec. elem. Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select



The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Accept

dialog Press the "Accept dialog" softkey to accept the chosen alternative.

Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Continue

Close

contour Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" softkeys.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Parameter Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X Y L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees Degrees


5


Y Yα Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L α1 α2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees Degrees

Y Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0




mm mm

Additional command



5


Parameter Description for contour element "circle" Unit

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Y I J α1 α2 β1 β2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L2 ϕ2

α1 α2 β1 β2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: distance between pole and center of circle inc: distance between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

Y Yα Z J Jα

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.



5


K α1 α2 β1 β2

Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L2 ϕ2 α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: distance between pole and center of circle inc: distance between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

Y Z J K α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees



mm mm

Additional command



5


5.6.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • appended, • modified, • inserted or • deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append contour element




Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...

Select the required contour element via softkey.



The required contour element is appended to the contour.

Modifying contour element




Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.


The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphics.

Enter the desired changes.


The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.


5


Changing dialog selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change

selection Press the "Change selection" softkey.

The two selection options appear again.

Select



Accept

dialog Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert a contour element




Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

... .

Select a new contour element via softkey.



The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor. The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.


5


Delete contour element




Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete

element Press the "Delete element" softkey.


The selected contour element is deleted.

5.6.5 Path milling

The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the contour. Machining can be performed in either direction, i.e. in the direction of the programmed contour or in the opposite direction.

For machining in the opposite direction, contours must not consist of more than 170 contour elements (incl. chamfers/radii). Special aspects (except for feed values) of free G code input are ignored during path milling in the opposite direction to the contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)

for path milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time.

It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a cutter radius offset and traversing the center path.

Cutter radius compensation

The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour to the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different approach and retract modes as well as between different approach and retract strategies.


5


• Approach/Retract mode You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant, semicircle or along a straight line. In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the radius of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance from the outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of the contour. You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction, for example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle mode.

Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle

• Approach/Retract strategy Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse order. In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane. You can also specify different strategies for approach and retraction, for example, approach in the plane and retract three-dimensionally.

Center path

If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed contour is milled on the center path. In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for closed contours, for example.


5


Slot side compensation

When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or without a slot wall offset.

• Slot wall offset Off ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is equal to the slot width. If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will not be parallel.

• Slot wall offset On ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width is larger than the tool diameter.

If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt inserted in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The parameter D is used to specify the slot width.

Contour

milling > Path

milling >

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" softkeys.




Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining method

Roughing


Machining direction

Forward: machining is performed in the programmed contour direction Backward: machining is performed in the opposite direction to the programmed contour


5


Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the programmed direction:

Machining to the right of the contour

Machining to the left of the contour

Machining along the center path

Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Slot wall offset D X0 X1 DX UX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Activate slot wall offset Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth based on Z0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm

mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) -- (for chamfer only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm


5


Approach mode

Approach mode: In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Approach strategy Axis by axis

Spatial (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm

L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

Retract mode Retract mode In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Retract strategy Axis by axis

Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm

L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm

Retraction mode

If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of the contour to the beginning). • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or X0+safety

clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

• Safety clearance • No retraction


5


5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket

When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.

Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you

want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two machining steps in separate blocks.

The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the parameters that appear when you press the "All parameters" softkey. These parameters must correspond to the parameters from the previous removal step. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Centering 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Centering 5. Contour pocket 1 6. Predrilling 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Predrilling 9. Contour pocket 1 10. Machining 11. Contour pocket 2 12. Machining

If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.


5


Centering

Contour

milling > Predrilling

> Centering

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering" softkeys.

All

parameters Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional

parameters.

Parameter Description of centering Unit




TR Reference tool for centering

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm % mm


5


C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm % mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Predrilling

Contour

milling > Predrilling

> Predrilling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling" softkeys in this order.

All

parameters Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional

parameters.

Parameter Description of predrilling Unit




TR Reference tool for predrilling


Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm


5


X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth


Retraction mode





5


5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing)

The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must

enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an island. Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings"). If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this into account during stock removal.

You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time. For further details on finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour pocket".

During insertion with oscillation, the message “Ramp distance too short” will appear if the tool on the ramp distance is removed from the insertion point by less than the milling cutter diameter. If this occurs, please reduce the angle of insertion.

Contour

milling > Pocket

milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.

Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameter Description for roughing Unit





5



Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth


Starting point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point) Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point) Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm


5


Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).


EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm


mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode





5


5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket

When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands) and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for stock removal.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Machining 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Machining 5. Contour pocket 1 6. Solid machine residual material 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Solid machine residual material


Contour

milling > Pocket

resid. mat.

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat." softkeys.

All


parameters.


5







TR Reference tool for residual material


Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm





5





Retraction mode




5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket

If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish the pocket.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for

finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined once. ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for roughing.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour pocket 2. Contour island 3. Remove stock (roughing) 4. Contour pocket 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour island 7. Path milling (finishing)


5


Contour

milling > Pocket

milling


Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit





Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ




5


C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX



Starting point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point) Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point) Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm

Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).


EP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm


mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode





5


Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit




Machining mode

Edge finishing

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode





5


5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket

Contour

milling > Pocket

milling


Select "Chamfer" machining mode.

If you want to mill a chamfer and have programmed inside corners without filleting during rounding, you must specify the radius of the finishing tool as the rounding in the contour.

Parameter Description for chamfer: Unit




Machining method

Chamfering

Z0 FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm


5


CP Z0 FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees mm mm mm

C0 X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees mm mm mm

Retraction mode




5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)

The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and

then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer) for milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the second time. For more on finishing, see Section "Finishing the contour spigot".

If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for a spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.


5


Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance. The start point is calculated by ShopTurn.

2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining feedrate.

3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside in. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").

4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in parallel with the contours from outside in.

6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.


Contour

milling > Spigot

milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.

Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameter Description for roughing Unit




Machining protection Roughing


5


Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm







Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or


If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.


5


5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot

When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for clearing.

If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program as follows:

1. Contour blank 1 2. Contour spigot 1 3. Clear spigot 1 4. Contour blank 2 5. Contour spigot 2 6. Clear spigot 2 7. Contour blank 1 8. Contour spigot 1 9. Clear residual material spigot 1 10. Contour blank 2 11. Contour spigot 2 12. Clear residual material spigot 2


Contour

milling > Spigot

resid. mat.

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat." softkeys.

All


parameters.


5







TR Reference tool for residual material


Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm





5





Retraction mode




5.6.13 Finishing a contour spigot

If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for

finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined once.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour blank 2. Contour spigot 3. Mill spigot (roughing) 4. Contour blank 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour spigot 7. Path milling (finishing)

Contour

milling > Spigot

milling


Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.


5


Parameter Description of finishing the base Unit





Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ




5


C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX



Retraction mode




Parameter Description of finishing the edge Unit




Machining mode

Edge finishing

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm


5


CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode




5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot

If you have planned edge breaking, mill a chamfer after that.

Contour

milling > Spigot

milling


Select "Chamfer" machining mode.

Parameter Description of finishing the edge





5


Machining mode

Chamfering

Z0 FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

CP Z0 FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees mm mm mm

C0 X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs) Chamfer width; abs

Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degrees mm mm mm

Retraction mode




5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.7 Calling a subroutine

5


5.7 Calling a subroutine If you require the same machining steps in the programming of

different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.

ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and

subroutine. This means that you can call a "standard" sequence or G code program as subroutine in another sequence program. In this subroutine, you can also call another subroutine. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.

If you want to call a sequence program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines.

The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", and “Subroutines" directories).

If you want to call a subroutine located on another drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL". References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl SINUMERIK 840Dsl

Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the subroutine is called. These settings also remain active even after the subroutine has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subroutine (see Section "Changing program settings").

Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call

as a subroutine in another program.

Place the cursor in the machining plan of the main program on the program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.7 Calling a subroutine

5


Sub-

routine > Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" softkeys.

Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.

Directory Path to enter ShopTurn ShopTurn Separate directory XYZ XYZ Part programs MPF Subprograms SPF Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.

You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the subroutine does not have the file extension specified for the directory in which the subroutine is stored.

Directory Specified file extension ShopTurn *.mpf Separate directory XYZ *.mpf Part programs *.mpf Subprograms *.spf


The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

Subroutine call"DRILL"

Subroutine call

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.8 Repeating program blocks

5


5.8 Repeating program blocks If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed

more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once. ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.

You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start

and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used for this.

You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within chained program blocks.

It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following program blocks.

Start mark

End mark

Repetition

Repeating program blocks

Set

marker > Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.

Enter a name.


A start marker is inserted behind the current block.

Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.

Set

marker > Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys.

Enter a name.


An end marker is inserted behind the current block.

Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat the program blocks.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5


Repeat >

Press the "Various" and "Repeat" softkeys.

Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of times the blocks are to be repeated.


The marked program blocks are repeated.

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine

workpieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually. Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it to the new machining position. You can program these operations with the "Counterspindle" function.

ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:

• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit stop if necessary)

• Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the counterspindle

• Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the new machining position

• Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face steps

• Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)

If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle machining operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return position defined in a machine data code.


Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must specify in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand. In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the work offset that you want to use.

To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for three typical applications are provided below: • Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine

counterspindle • Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece) • Machine bars

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5


Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine counterspindle The programming for this operation might look like this:

Alternative 1: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Gripping 3. Pulling 4. Rear 5. Machine counterspindle

Alternative 2: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Complete (gripping, pulling

and rear face) 3. Machine counterspindle

Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the "Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings"). As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are programmed in a machine data code.


Teach park

pos. You can enter the XP and ZP coordinates from the park position of the tool during the gripping, or accept the current tool positions with the “Teach park pos.” softkey. Teaching the park position is possible only if you have selected the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

Teach angl.

offset If you specify an angular offset α1 between the main spindle and the counterspindle, this will have no effect on machining on the backside of the workpiece. You can enter the angle difference directly into the parameter mask or accept the current angular offset using the "Teach angl. offset" softkey.

Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by amount Z1. ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the offset in the selected work offset.

Rear The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece. The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset. Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled. The counterspindle is now the master spindle.


5


Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the machining operation for the rear face as for the front face. Make sure that the Y axis points to the opposite direction during milling operations. If this is not wanted, then mirroring of the Y axis must be programmed.

Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece) The programming might look like this: 1. Rear face

WO: Work offset is only activated ZV: Parameter is not calculated.

2. Machine counterspindle

Rear Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring the workpiece. The work offset that you choose in the parameterization screen form isonly activated and not calculated. This means that the workpiece zero for counterspindle machining should be stored in the work offset. In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.

Machine bars If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just once.

Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example: 1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece

zero is stored 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined

Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows: 1. Start marker 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (pull blank: yes; parting cycle: yes) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. Front 7. End marker 8. Repeat from start to end marker


5


Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle. You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle in this case as this is calculated from theparting cycle parameters. The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the machining plan.

Front As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished, machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate a work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the "Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was active before the workpiece was gripped. The main spindle is now the master spindle again.

Teach-in park position

and angular offset

Manually rotate the counterspindle chuck to the desired position, and move the tool to the desired position.

Counter-

spindle > Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" softkeys.

Select the “Gripping” or “Complete” programming step.

Select “MKS” tool under park position.

Teach park

pos.

Press the “Teach park pos.” softkey.

The current tool park position will be saved.

Teach angl.

offset Press the “Teach angl. offset" softkey.

The current angular difference between the main and counter spindles will be saved.


5



Function Select from five different functions: • Gripping • Pulling • Rear • Front • Complete

Park position XP ZP Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system MCS: The park position is entered into the machine coordinate system; teaching of the park position and the angular offset is possible Park position of the tool in the X direction (abs) Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):



No spindle rotation

mm mm rev/min

α1 Z1 ZR FR Fixed stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degrees mm mm mm/min

Work offset Z1 F

Pulling: Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved. Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc) Feedrate

mm mm/min

Work offset ZnW ZV

Rear side: Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm

Work offset

Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face


5


Park position

XP ZP

Complete: WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system MCS: The park position is entered in the machine coordinate system; the teaching of the park position and the angular offset is possible Park position of tool in X direction (abs) Park position of tool in Z direction (abs)

mm mm

Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):



No spindle rotation

rev/min

α1 Z1 ZR FR Fixed stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degrees mm mm mm/min

Pull blank F Parting cycle

Pulling: Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece) No: Do not pull blank Feedrate for pulling Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out. No: No automatic parting.

mm/min

Work offset ZnW ZV

Rear side: Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.10 Changing program settings

5


5.10 Changing program settings All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of

the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.

The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active

until they are changed.

Retraction

Any changed return plane takes effect starting with the safety clearance of the last cycle, because the additional retraction from the next cycle is completed.

Machining direction

The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the workpiece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of path milling. The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is programmed with a machine data code.


Down-cut Up-cut

Direction of rotation of machining for milling a pocket on the end face

Settings

> Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.

Enter the desired parameters. For a description of the parameters, see Section "Creating a new program".


The new settings for the program are loaded.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.11 Calling zero offsets

5


5.11 Calling zero offsets You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.

You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program. The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank.

You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section

"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the selected offset here.

Transfor-

mations > Work

offset >

Press the "Various", "Transformations", and "Work offset" softkeys.

Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.

-or-

Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.

-or-

Work

offset Press the "Work offset" softkey.

The work offset list is displayed.

-and-

Select a work offset.

-and-

To


The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.

To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero inthe field.

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5


5.12 Defining coordinate transformations To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate

system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate system.

Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.

You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation. In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate transformations.

• Offset For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.

New offset Additive offset

• Rotation You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to counterclockwise rotation.

New rotation Additive rotation

On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems with the coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5


• C axis rotation You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable subsequent machining operations to be performed at a particular position on the end face or peripheral surface. The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.


New C axis rotation

Additive C axis rotation

• Scaling You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor.

New scaling

Additive scaling

• Mirroring Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.

New mirroring Additive mirroring

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

5


Transfor-

mations > Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.

Offset

> ... Mirroring

> Select the coordinate transformation using the softkey.

Select whether you want to program a new or an additive coordinate transformation.

Enter the desired coordinates.

5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle

or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle approach and return").

You can insert the approach/return cycle between any sequence

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance approached after the last machining operation.

If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point. If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of 6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.

If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

Caution

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.13 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

5


Approach/

Retract Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Retract" softkeys.


F1 Feedrate for approach to first position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F2 Feedrate for approach to second position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm

Z3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm

Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed and change tool Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position programmed No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")

D Edge number (not with tool change "no")

F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5


5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program You can program G code blocks in a sequence program. You can also

insert comments to explain the program.

The G code blocks in sequence programs are never checked when sequence programs are processed.

You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:

References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D

You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.

ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.

If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").

Caution If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction zonespecified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

In the machining plan of a sequence program, position the cursor

on the program block after which you want to insert a G code block.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5



Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must always start with a semicolon (;).

The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the block number in the machining plan.

G code block

G code in sequence program

5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.15 Teaching

5


5.15 Teaching The "Teach” function enables you to program and execute machining

steps while simultaneously creating a subroutine for other workpieces.

The procedure for different variants of the teaching is described in the following:

• Teaching cycles • Teaching position samples • Teaching contour objects

5.15.1 Teaching a cycle

Each machining step is taught according to the following example:

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program You create a new program and set the program header (see "Creating a new program").

2. Creating a machining step You define a machining step (see “Creating program blocks”).

3. Accepting the machining step Save the values with the “Accept” softkey. The parameter mask is closed and the work plan is displayed.

4. Execution Position the cursor on the program step and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered.

5. NC Start Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.

Program the next machining step the same way if the machining provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the program block.

You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control the machining results.

5 01/2008 ShopTurn functions5.15 Teaching

5


5.15.2 Teaching a position pattern

You can teach any position pattern.

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program 2. Programming technology cycles and positions/position samples

Program the desired drilling/milling cycles and the position sample (see “Drilling", “Milling”, and “Positions and Position sample”).

3. Execution Position the cursor on the position sample and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered and you will receive a query.

4. Select the work step and the position sample. 5. NC Start

Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.



5 ShopTurn functions 01/2008 5.15 Teaching

5


5.15.3 Teaching a contour object

You have the option of teaching contour objects for rotation andmilling operations.

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program 2. Programming contours and technology cycles

Program the desired contours and cycles and define the individual contour elements (see "Creating a new contour", "Contour turning", and "Contour milling").

3. Execution Position the cursor on the desired work step and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered.

4. NC Start Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.



6 01/2008 Working with manual machine 6


Working with manual machine 6.1 Manual Machine...................................................................................................... 6-334

6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-335

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode........................................................ 6-335 6.3.1 Traversing axes ...................................................................................................... 6-336 6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-337 6.3.3 Straight turning........................................................................................................ 6-338

6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-339 6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine .................................................................................. 6-340 6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine ................................................................................. 6-340 6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine ................................................................................... 6-341

6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-342

6 Working with manual machine 01/2008 6.1 Manual Machine

6


6.1 Manual Machine "Manual Machine" offers a modified comprehensive spectrum of

functions for manual mode. You can carry out all important machining processes in “Manual” mode without writing a program.

For working in "Manual Machine" mode, you will need the "Manual Machine" software option.

The appearance of the displayed softkeys can vary, according to which coordinate system is set. Machining before the center of rotation is typical.

Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for this.

Main screen After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen appears.

Basic manual machine screen

Machining options Workpieces can be machined in the following ways using "Manual Machine":

• Manual mode • Single-cycle machining

6 01/2008 Working with manual machine6.2 Zero offsets

6


6.2 Zero offsets As an alternative to the "Set ZPO" function (see Sec. "Setting the

zero-point offset"), you have the option of inputting the values of the zero-point offset directly into the zero-point offsets list.

Activating the zero offset



Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

ZPO

selection Press the "ZPO selection” softkey

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode In "manual" mode, you can directly carry out simple machining

processes without having to write a program. The following functions are available to you for machining in manual mode:

• Axis movements • Taper turning • Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)

Tool, spindle speed, and direction of spindle rotation are activated by "Cycle Start".

A change in feedrate immediately becomes active.

6 Working with manual machine 01/2008 6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6


6.3.1 Traversing axes

For preparatory actions and simple traversing movements, input the parameters directly into the "Manual" basic screen form.

Tool selection Select the desired tool in "T".

Input the feedrate and the spindle speed.

Select the direction of spindle rotation.

-or- Set the direction of rotation via the machine control panel.


The spindle starts immediately after the tool is selected. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Machining

X…

Select the axis to be traversed at the machine control panel.

… +

Press the "-" or "+" key on the machine control panel.

-or- Select the direction with the aid of the cross-switching lever.

The axes are moved at the set machining feedrate.


The active direction is graphically displayed in the basic screen by means of a wind rose.

6 01/2008 Working with manual machine6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6



T Tool

F Machining feedrate mm/minmm/rev

S1 Main spindle rev/min m/min

S2 Tool spindle rev/min


: Spindle is turning counter-clockwise : Spindle is turning clockwise

: Spindle stops

: No change

6.3.2 Taper turning

The basic effective direction can be selected via the axis direction keys or via the cross-switching lever. In addition, a taper angle (α) can also be input.

The “taper turning” function is not available if two tool turrets are installed on the X axis of your machine,

Jog Taper

turning

Press the "Taper turning" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

Select the tool, spindle, and spindle direction and specify the machining feedrate.

Input the desired angle α.

Selecting/deselecting the taper turning and changing the angle α is

only possible in the reset state.


T, F, S See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

α Turning of the coordinate system Degrees

6 Working with manual machine 01/2008 6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6


6.3.3 Straight turning Use this function for simple, straight machining (e.g. face or

longitudinal turning).

Jog

Select the "Strght" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

All

axes -or-

Xα -or-

Zα

Select the desired straight machining via the "All axes" softkeys, "Xα" or "Zα", and input the desired values for the traversing path or target position and the angle, if necessary.


F See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

X Z

Y C Z2

All Axes: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) Target position of an added axis, if it exists (abs. or inc.)

mm mm mm mm mm

Z

α

XAlpha Target position in direction X (abs. or inc.) Angle of the straight line to the X axis

mm Degrees

X α

ZAlpha Target position in direction Z (abs. or inc.) Angle of the straight line to the Z axis

mm Degrees

6 01/2008 Working with manual machine6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6


6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode The following functions are available to you for comprehensive

machining in manual mode:

• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling, threads)

• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping) • Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)

General machining

sequence For more complex machining processes, proceed in the following order:

1. Select the desired function via the corresponding softkey. Input the desired values in the parameter screen form.

2. Press the "OK" softkey in order to accept the values. The input screen form closes. A line with the specified parameters is displayed on the basic screen.

3. Press the "Cycle Start" key. The selected cycle is started.

You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and correct the inputs.

Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

Approaching and

returning When machining the workpiece, you traverse from the current position to the machining start point. After the machining process, the tool is returned along a direct path to the starting point.

6 Working with manual machine 01/2008 6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6


6.4.1 Drilling with Manual Machine

For drilling on the face or peripheral surface of a workpiece, thefollowing cycles are available to you under Automatic:

• Drilling centered • Thread centered • Centering • Drilling • Reaming • Deep hole drilling • Tapping • Thread milling

The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to theparameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Drilling").

Drilling can only be performed at individual positions. To define theposition, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 andZ0 (peripheral surface machining).

6.4.2 Turning with Manual Machine

For turning a workpiece, the following turning cycles are available toyou under Automatic:

• Stock removal • Recess • Undercut • Thread • Parting

The parameters of the input screen forms (with the exception of thread-cutting) correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Turning").

Thread cutting In addition to the functions that are made available by "thread-cutting"

under Automatic, you can insert idle cuts during the machining process under "Manual Machine."

You can interrupt the infeed of the cutting depth during the machining process by inserting idle cuts, in order to smooth the flanks for example.

Idle

cut You can insert idle cuts using the "Idle cut" softkey. This softkey only works during machining.

6 01/2008 Working with manual machine6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6


Reworking threads You can rework existing threads, when repairing previously cut threads for example or as the result of changes that arise from re-measuring (see Sec. "Reworking Threads").

If you want to rework some threads, input the initial plunge depth E (inc.). This is the depth that was reached during a previous machining.

By inputting the plunge depth, you avoid unnecessary idle cuts when reworking the threads.

6.4.3 Milling with Manual Machine

For milling simple geometric shapes, the following functions areavailable to you just as under Automatic:

• Rectangular pocket • Circular pocket • Rectangular spigot • Circular spigot • Longitudinal slot • Circumferential slot • Multiple edge • Engraving

The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Milling").

Machining can only be performed at individual positions. To define the position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and Z0 (peripheral surface machining).

6 Working with manual machine 01/2008 6.5 Simulation

6


6.5 Simulation For more complex machining processes, you can check the result of

your inputs with the aid of the simulation, without having to traverse the axes (see Sec. "Simulating Machining"). The execution of the work steps is graphically displayed on the screen during this.

In "Manual" mode, you can simulate a work step with an already opened and filled out parameter screen form.

Setting up a blank shape For the graphical display, a pre-defined blank shape is used. You can modify the blank as you like (such as for a G-code program) (see Sec. "Changing the blank shape for a G-code program").

�

7 01/2008 G code program 7


G code program 7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-344

7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-347

7.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 7-349

7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-352

7 G code program 01/2008 7.1 Creating a G code program

7


7.1 Creating a G code program If you do not want to program a program with ShopTurn functions, you

can also create a G-code program with G-code commands in the ShopTurn operator interface.

You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.

In addition, parameter screen forms provide you with support when measuring and programming contour, drilling, turning, and milling cycles. G code is generated from the individual forms, which you can recompile back to the screen forms. The measuring cycle support function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


For a detailed description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and of cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to: References: /PG/, Programming Manual Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PGA/, Programming Manual Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /PGZ/, Programming Manual Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl /BNM/, Programming Manual Measuring Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

You can call up context-sensitive help, if you require more information on particular G code commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50.3.

For a detailed description of the online help, please refer to: References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/840D sl

Creating a G code

program


Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

G code

program Press the "New" and "G code program" softkeys.

Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters with uppercase letters.

7 01/2008 G code program7.1 Creating a G code program

7


-or- +

Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

The G code editor is opened.

Enter the desired G code commands.

Calling a tool Continue

> Tools

Select the "Continue" and "Tools" softkeys if you want to select a

tool from the tool list.

-and-

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

To


The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor. Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"

In contrast to sequence programming, the settings stored in tool management do not automatically become active when the tool is called up. This means that, in addition to the tool, you must also program the toolchange (M6), the direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle speed (S...) and the coolant (M7/M8).

Example: ... T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool M6 ;Change tool M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle ...

Cycle support

Contour ...

Turning

Using the softkey, select whether you would like support for programming contours, drilling, milling, or turning cycles.

Create

contour ... Select the cycle you want via the softkey.


OK


The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-

compile Select the "Recompile" softkey.

The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.

7 G code program 01/2008 7.1 Creating a G code program

7


Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Measuring cycle support

Switch to the extended horizontal softkey bar.

Measure

turning -or- Measure

milling Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling".

Calibrate

meas. cal. ... Select the required measuring cycle via the softkey.


OK


The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor, if you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-

compile Select the "Recompile" softkey.

The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Online help (PCU 50.3) Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on

an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.

Press the "Help" key.

The relevant help screen is displayed.

7 01/2008 G code program7.2 Executing a G code program

7


7.2 Executing a G code program During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later.

Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen to enable you to check the programming result without moving the machine axes. For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".

The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:

• The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the machine.

• A program created in G code is available. • The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

When executing a G code program, the same functions are available as for executing a sequence program (see Section "Machining a workpiece").

Simulating G code

program

-or-


Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or-


The program is opened in the G code editor.

Press the "Simulation" softkey.

Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in graphical form.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from the simulation screen.

7 G code program 01/2008 7.2 Executing a G code program

7


Executing G code program

-or-


-and-

Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-and-

Execute


-or-

Press the "Execute" softkey if you are in the "Program" operating area.

ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G-code program.

Cycle Start


Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.

7 01/2008 G code program7.3 G code editor

7


7.3 G code editor You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of

program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently

executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet been executed. These blocks are highlighted.

The following functions are available in the G code editor: • Select

You can select any G code. • Copy/paste

You can copy and paste G code within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the G code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhereelse.

• Search/replace In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string and replace it with a different one.

• To start/end You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.

• Numbering When you insert a new or copied G-code block between two existing G-code blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new block number. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. Using the "Re-number" function, you can renumber the G-code blocks in ascending order.

The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a

G code program.

Selecting a G code

Place the cursor at the position in the program where you want your selection to start.

Mark


Position the cursor at the point in the program at which the highlighting should end.

The G code is selected.

7 G code program 01/2008 7.3 G code editor

7


Copying a G code

Select the G code that you want to copy.

Copy


The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even if you switch to another program.

Pasting a G code

Copy the G code that you want to insert.

Insert


The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front of the cursor.

Cutting a G code

Select the G code that you want to cut.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey.

The selected G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.

Finding a G code

Search


A new vertical softkey bar appears.

Enter the character string that you want to locate.


The G code program is searched for the character string in the forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Continue


necessary.

The next character string found is displayed.

7 01/2008 G code program7.3 G code editor

7


Finding and replacing a G code

Search


A new vertical softkey bar appears.

Search/

replace Press the "Search/replace" softkey.

Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters that you want to insert in its place.


The G code program is searched for the character string in the forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Replace all

Press the "Replace all" softkey if you want to replace the

character string throughout the entire G code program.

-or-

Continue

search Press the "Continue search" softkey if you want to continue the

search without replacing the instance of the character string found.

-or-

Replace

Press the "Replace" softkey if you want to replace the character

string at this point in the G code program.

Jumping to start/end

Continue

> To

start

To

end

Select the "Continue" and "To start" or "To end" softkeys.

The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.

Renumbering the G code blocks

Continue

> Renumber

> Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" softkeys.

Enter the number of the first block and the increment between block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).


The blocks are renumbered. You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment or block number.

7 G code program 01/2008 7.4 Arithmetic variables

7


7.4 Arithmetic variables Arithmetic variables (R variables) are variables that you can use within

a G code program. G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a value in the R variable list to variables that can be read.

Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.

Displaying R variables

-or-

Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.

Press the "R vari." softkey.

The R variable list is opened.

Finding R variables

Search


Enter the number of the variable you want to find.


The variable is displayed.

Changing R variables

Place the cursor on the input field of the variable that you want to change.

Enter the new value.

The new value of the variables is applied immediately.

Deleting R variables

Place the cursor on the input field of the variable whose value you want to delete.

Press the "Backspace" key.

The value of the variable is deleted.

8 01/2008 Working with a B axis 8


Working with a B axis 8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-354

8.2 Tool alignment for turning ....................................................................................... 8-356

8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-356 8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-357 8.3.2 Approach/retraction................................................................................................. 8-358

8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-360

8.5 Measuring a tool......................................................................................................8-361

8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-362

8 Working with a B axis 01/2008 8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8


8.1 Turning machines with a B axis You can align milling and turning machines with an additional B axis.

The initial setting in which all tools must be dimensioned is B=0.

In turning operations, you can align the tool for special machining tasks via the B axis and C axis.

In milling operations, you can tilt the WCS via the B axis and C axis to allow milling and drilling on inclined surfaces.

The B axis is also used for aligning tools for end face and lateral surface machining.

Alignment angle β and γ Alignment angles β und γ are required for turning with tool alignment.

X

Z

β

β : Rotation around the Y axis (with the B axis) γ: Rotation around the Z axis (with the tool spindle)

8 01/2008 Working with a B axis8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8


Turning Alignment angles allow you to perform a wide range of different turning operations (for example, internal and external longitudinal machining, surface machining with a main spindle and counterspindle, residual material) without changing the tool.

Display of the B axis The B axis is displayed in the following windows:

• Axis position display in actual value window, • In the “Positioning” window to position axes in manual operation, • You can operate the “Additional axes” softkey to have the B axis

displayed in the zero offset list and define its offset.

8 Working with a B axis 01/2008 8.2 Tool alignment for turning

8


8.2 Tool alignment for turning The input fields for the β and γ angle for aligning the tool are available

in the tool screenform and in all turning screenforms.

β angle Two arrow settings are available for the main alignment of the tool, which you can toggle with the “Alternat.” softkey.

: β = 0° : β = 90°

You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of your choice.

The counterspindle is programmed in exactly the same way as the main spindle.

The direction display of the arrows depends on the settings. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

γ angle In input field “γ”, you can enter two main directions (0° and 180°) via the “Alternat.” softkey.

You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of your choice. However, this value may only differ slightly.


8.3 Milling with a B axis No special entries are required for face machining and peripheral

surface machining.

Face milling is performed with β = 0° (G17). If you are machining on the face end of the counterspindle, γ = 0° (G17) corresponds to the opposite B axis position.

The peripheral surface is milled with β = 90° (G19), even if you aremachining with the counterspindle.

Machining on an inclined surface

You can define inclined surfaces in a swivel mask.

You can enter the rotation of the planes around the geometry axes (X, Y, Z) of the tool coordinate system just as described in the workpiece drawing. The rotation of the workpiece coordinate system in the program is then automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant Band C axis of the machine during machining.

8 01/2008 Working with a B axis8.3 Milling with a B axis

8


The swivel axes are always rotated to place the tool axis perpendicular to the machining axis for machining. During machining, the rotary axes are then permanently set.

The coordinate system is adapted to the surface to be machined irrespective of the required rotary axis positions.

8.3.1 Swiveling

The main programming procedure is:

• Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined via the swivel mask.

• Machine with the setting “Face B”. • If another machining type follows, swiveling is automatically

deselected.

The swiveled coordinates are maintained in the Reset status and after Power On. So you can still move out of an inclined hole, for example, with retraction in the +Z direction.


Swiveling is executed one axis at a time. In the case of axial swiveling,the coordinate system is rotated about each axis in turn, with each rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis sequence can be freely selected.

Transfor-

mations > Swivel

>

Press the "Various" and "Transformations" softkeys.

Initial

setting

Press the "Initial setting" softkey to restore the initial state, i.e. to zero the values again. This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to its original orientation.

8 Working with a B axis 01/2008 8.3 Milling with a B axis

8



T Tool name

RP Retraction plane for face end B mm

C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees

X0 Reference point for rotation mm

Y0 Reference point for rotation mm

Z0 Reference point for rotation mm

X Axis angle The sequence of the axes Degrees

Y Axis angle can be replaced as required Degrees

Z Axis angle with "Alternat." Degrees

X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before

(X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work offsets").

8.3.2 Approach/retraction

If you want to optimize approach/retraction for swiveling with the B axis, you can create a special cycle that ignores the automatic approach/retraction strategy.

You can insert the approach/retraction cycle between any sequence program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/retraction cycle is the safety

clearance approached after the last machining operation. If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point. The 1st, 3rd, and 6th position moves the linear axes, while the 2nd and 5th position moves the rotary axes. If no tool change is needed you can generate no more than 6 motion blocks.

The numbers (1 – 6) represent the processing sequence.

If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/retraction, you can call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

8 01/2008 Working with a B axis8.3 Milling with a B axis

8


Caution

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/retraction cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.


F1 Feedrate for approach to first position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Y1 Retraction to safety clearance mm

β2 Beta angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees

γ2 Gamma angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees

Followup The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling. Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed and change tool Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position programmed No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")

D Edge number (not with tool change "no")

F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



β5 Beta angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees

γ5 Gamma angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees

Followup The position of the workpiece tip is maintained during swiveling. Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual

F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



Y6 Retraction to safety clearance mm

8 Working with a B axis 01/2008 8.4 Position pattern

8


8.4 Position pattern In drilling and milling operations with face end B, position patterns "full

circle/pitch circle" provide the following options for machining on inclined surfaces

• with swivel plane • with C axis

Positions

>



Z0 X0 Y0 α0 α1 R N Positioning

Face end B: on swivel plane Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only) Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Number of positions on the circle Straight line Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees mm

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 α1

N

with C axis Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to C axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only) Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction. Number of positions on circle


8 01/2008 Working with a B axis8.5 Measuring a tool

8


8.5 Measuring a tool To determine the tool dimensions, the alignment (i.e. the β angle)

must be specified.

For turning tools, an input field for the γ angle also appears.

β angle In order to measure milling and turning tools, you can make the two main settings β = 0° and β = 90° and set a value input field by toggling.

γ angle In order to measure turning tools, you can set the γ angle 0° and 180° by toggling.

Positioning rotary axes You can position rotary axes with NC Start. Before the length is set the rotary axis positions are checked. If they

deviate too much from the prescribed values, the message “Tool alignment beta inconsistent, press NC Start” (or gamma) is displayed.


8 Working with a B axis 01/2008 8.6 Tool selection for manual mode

8


8.6 Tool selection for manual mode For preparatory tasks in manual mode, tool selection and spindle

control is always performed centrally in the T, S, M window (see also Section "Selecting the tool and spindle").

Alignment angle Turning tools:

To align the turning tools, you can toggle between settings β = 0° and β = 90° for the β angle and between settings 0° and 180° for the γ angle. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any value.

Milling tools:

To align the milling tools you can toggle between settings β = 0° and β = 90°. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any value.

9 01/2008 Working with two tool holders 9


Working with two tool holders 9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders.......................................................................... 9-364

9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-364

9.3 Measuring a tool......................................................................................................9-365

9 Working with two tool holders 01/2008 9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders

9


9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ShopTurn allows you to work on a turning machine with two tool

holders, both of which are installed on an X axis. The tool holders might be turrets, multifix, or a combination of both.

The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction. As both tool holders are installed on the same axis it is only ever possible to machine with one tool.

The workpiece is always located between the two tool holders. The tool lengths of all tools, i.e. of both tool holders, have the same reference point, which is usually on tool holder 1. That is why the tool lengths of the tools of the second tool holder are always longer than those of the tools on the first tool holder.

9.2 Programming with two tool holders

You always program in the basic coordinate system (WCS of the first tool holder). You do not have to specify in which tool holder the tool is inserted.

If a tool on the second tool holder is selected, the X and Y axes are mirrored and the main spindle and counter spindle are offset (rotated) by 180°.

X

Z

Z

X

L2

L1

Tool holder 1

Tool holder 2

Workpiece coordinate

system for use with the

1st tool holder

Workpiece coordinate

system for use with the

2nd tool holder

In the simulation the tool is always displayed on the correct side, as it

will be used on the machine.

9 01/2008 Working with two tool holders9.3 Measuring a tool

9


The programmed C offset around 180° only affects C axes, not spindles.

It is not possible to machine a thread with tools that are distributed between both tool holders.

G code programming The following points must be taken into account in G code programming. • After a tool change, mirroring of the tools on the second tool

holder is automatically activated. • When a TRANSMIT command is programmed, mirroring of the

tools on the second tool holder is automatically activated. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

9.3 Measuring a tool Toggle settings "Position 1" and "Position 2" are available for

scratching for tool measurement. Here you can set in which tool holder the tool to be measured is located.

9 Working with two tool holders 01/2008 9.3 Measuring a tool

9


Notes

10 01/2008 Tool management 10


Tool management 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................. 10-368

10.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................. 10-374 10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-374 10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool........................................................ 10-376 10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-377

10.3 Sorting tools .......................................................................................................... 10-378

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list.............................................................................. 10-378

10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ............................................... 10-379

10.6 Relocating a tool ................................................................................................... 10-381

10.7 Positioning a magazine......................................................................................... 10-383

10.8 Entering tool wear data ......................................................................................... 10-383

10.9 Activating tool monitoring...................................................................................... 10-384

10.10 Managing magazine locations .............................................................................. 10-386

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10


10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and

technology data of these tools must be known to ShopTurn before you can execute a program (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"). ShopTurn provides the tool list, tool wear list, and magazine list screen forms for managing your tools. With these, you can also manage tools that are not located in the revolver (magazine). The various lists can possibly have been changed by the machine manufacturer, in comparison to the following description.


Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be assigned to specific magazine locations. In addition, you have the capability of sorting or deleting tools at this point.

Tool list

Loc. Location number in the magazine

The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the machining position, has a gray background.

If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)

For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-gripper can also be displayed.


10 01/2008 Tool management10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10


Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and cutting edge position Using the "Alternat." key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge position.

Tool name The tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be specified as text or numbers.

DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool) (DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool, DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data You can find a detailed description of the tool offset data in Sec.

"Setting-up the Machine" (Section "Tools").

(D No.) edge The tool offset data shown here is valid for the currently selected cutting edge of a tool.

Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction

Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the radius or the diameter. For turning tools, you always specify the cutting edge radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.


Reference direction for the holder angle

The holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

The plate angle of a cutting tool The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev, inch/rev, turns/", or MODULE

Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill

Plat.width Plate width of a pin The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.


10


Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the program execution simulation.

N Number of teeth for a milling cutter The number of teeth for a milling machine From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of the tool tip for a drill When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into consideration.

Tool-specific specifications

Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or counter-spindle for turning tools.

If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the tool.

CW spindle rotation

CCW spindle rotation

Spindle not switched on

Coolant supply 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF during use of this tool

Coolant ON

Coolant OFF Observe that some machines do not have a coolant supply.



10


Multifix

If you use a multifix tool holder, the tool list looks like the following:

Tool list for a multifix tool holder

If you use multifix tool holders, the tool change takes place manually, i.e. the tools are swapped in and out by hand.

Tool selection for multifix tool holders

Tool

selection In the tool list, select the desired tool and activate it (the values of the tool) with the aid of the “Tool selection” softkey.


10


Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list. ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece. You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or identify them as oversized.

Tool wear list

Loc., Type, Tool name, DP

Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position, text/number designation of the tool and duplo number

(D No.) edge The displayed wear data is relative to the selected cutting edge of the tool.

∆ Length X Wear in the X direction

∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction

∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear of the radius or diameter

TC Tool monitoring through service life (T), quantity (C) or wear (W)

Prewarning limit Pre-warning limit of service life, quantity, or wear

Service life Quantity Wear

Service life of the tool Quantity of the finished workpieces Maximum allowable tool wear

Tool condition (last two columns)

Tool is disabled for machining (G) or over-sized (U).


10


Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can disable or enable individual magazine locations.

Magazine list

Loc., Type, Tool name, DP

Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position, text/number designation of the tool and duplo number

Location disable Disabling of the magazine location

Tool condition Display of the specified tool condition in the tool wear list

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10


10.2 Entering tools in the tool list You can input tools and their accompanying offset data directly into

the tool list or you can simply read-in existing tool data from outside of tool management (see Sec. "Securing/reading-in tool/zero-point data").

10.2.1 Creating a new tool

When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of generally available tool types. The tool type determines what geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

Create tool Install the new tool in the tool turret.


Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New >

tool Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughing

tool ... 3D_Probe

Select the desired tool type and the cutting edge position using the softkeys. Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge positions are made available to you.

10 01/2008 Tool management10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10


The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.

Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").

If you assign a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool" window appears. You can decide whether you would like to create a sister tool (see Sec. "Creating a sister tool").

Enter the offset data of the tool.

-or-

If you later want to change the cutting edge position of the tool, position the cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the preset options using the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.

Changing a tool name You have the option of later changing a tool’s name.

Position the cursor in the "Tool name" column and enter the desired name.

If you enter a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool" window appears. You are asked whether a duplo tool should be created.

Do not

rename

Press the "Do not rename" softkey if you do not want to create a sister tool.

Enter a new tool name.

Abort

Using the "Abort" softkey, you can cancel the process at any time.

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10


10.2.2 Creating multiple cutting edges for each tool

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of 9 edges for each tool.

There must be no gaps between the edges, i.e. if 3 edges are required for a tool, these must be edges 1 to 3.

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one

edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

Cutting

edges > New

edge Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.

Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.

Select another cutting edge position if appropriate.

Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.

Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.

Delete

edge Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool

edge offset data for an edge. You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge number.

D No. +

D No. -

By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge number respectively.

10 01/2008 Tool management10.2 Entering tools in the tool list

10


10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool

A replacement is a tool that you can use for the same machining beingperformed by an already input tool. You can use it, for example, to replace a broken tool.

For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools. The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools. For sister tools, the following data must agree with that of the original tool: • Tool type • Tool nose position • Tool radius • Direction of rotation • Coolant

New >

tool Create the sister tool as a new tool.

(see Sec. "Creating a new tool")

Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.

The “Create duplo tool” window is displayed.


The sister tool automatically receives the next available duplo number.

Input the tool offset data of the tool.

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.3 Sorting tools

10


10.3 Sorting tools When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it

is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.

-or-

Select the "Tool list" or “Tool wear” softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating section.

Sort

> Press the "Sort" softkey.

To

magazine -or- To name

-or- To type

-or- To

T-number

Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criterion.

The tools are listed in the new order.

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a

clearer overview.


Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.

Delete tool

Delete

Press the "Delete tool" softkey.

Press the "Delete" softkey.

The tool data of the selected tool is deleted and the magazine location is enabled again.

10 01/2008 Tool management10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10


10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at

present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered more than once.

Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.


When loading, ShopTurn automatically opens an empty space where you can load a tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.


Also when loading, you can directly specify an empty magazine location or define in which magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is displayed in the tool list, you can also change a tool directly into or out of the spindle. You can lock the loading and unloading via machine data.


Loading a tool into the magazine


Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will find it at the end of the tool list).

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.

-or-

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10


Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty location in the magazine and loading the tool


Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine.

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.


Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


An empty location is suggested.


The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.

Unloading an individual

tool from the magazine


Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Unload

Press the "Unload" softkey.

The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

10 01/2008 Tool management10.6 Relocating a tool

10


Unloading all tools from the magazine

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Unload

all Unload

Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.

All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort

You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the "Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is aborted. The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

10.6 Relocating a tool Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different

magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different location.

ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.


You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define themagazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the location number you require, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also attach or detach a tool directly to or from the spindle.


10 Tool management 01/2008 10.6 Relocating a tool

10


Specifying an empty location


Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.


Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty location


Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.


Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


An empty location is suggested.


The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

10 01/2008 Tool management10.7 Positioning a magazine

10


10.7 Positioning a magazine You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Positioning a magazine

location


Position the cursor on the magazine location that you would like to position on the loading point.

Position

Press the "Position" softkey.

The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

10.8 Entering tool wear data Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can

measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in workpiece machining.

When you input the wear values, ShopTurn checks whether or not the

values exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum total value that you can enter. The upper limits are set in a machine data code.


Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.

Enter the differences for length (∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z) and radius/diameter (∆ Radius/∆ ∅) in the appropriate columns.

The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10


10.9 Activating tool monitoring ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically

to ensure constant machining quality.

You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify them as oversize.

Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.


Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0, the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its place. Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.

Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder reaches "0".

Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z, or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too, the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value forwear W.

The wear monitoring function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at

which the first warning is displayed. The value for output of a warning due to the wear stage reached is calculated from the difference between the maximum wear and the warning limit entered.

Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to use them for workpiece machining.

Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations (left and right adjacent location) are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one. (This can also contain an oversize tool.)

10 01/2008 Tool management10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10


Monitoring tool use


Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.

In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor (T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).

Enter a pre-warning limit for the tool life, count, or wear.

Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number of workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.

The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G code commands before the end of the program in every program that calls the tools to be monitored: SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1 SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.

Entering tool statuses


Place the cursor on a tool.

Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want to disable the tool for machining.

-or-

Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you want to mark the tool as oversize.

The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine locations is now active.

10 Tool management 01/2008 10.10 Managing magazine locations

10


10.10 Managing magazine locations If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires

more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine location.

It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine

location.

In the "Tool condition" columns, you can also read whether a tool is disabled (G) or over-sized (U). You can change the tool conditions in the tool wear list (see Sec. "Activating tool monitoring").

Disable magazine

location


Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.


The letter "G" appears as a symbol for the disabling of the location.

Enable magazine location


Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.


The letter "G" is no longer visible and the magazine location is now free again.

11 01/2008 Program management 11


Program management 11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn...................................................................... 11-388

11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)........................ 11-389 11.2.1 Opening a program ............................................................................................... 11-391 11.2.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-392 11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive......................................... 11-393 11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-394 11.2.5 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-395 11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program ................................................................ 11-396 11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-397 11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-398

11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)........................................... 11-401 11.3.1 Opening a program ............................................................................................... 11-403 11.3.2 Executing a program............................................................................................. 11-404 11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ............................................................................... 11-405 11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive ........ 11-406 11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-408 11.3.6 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-409 11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program.................................................... 11-410 11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-412 11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data .................................................................. 11-412

11 Program management 01/2008 11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn

11


11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn All the programs for workpiece machining that you have created in

ShopTurn are stored in the NCK-working memory. You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager for execution, editing, copying, or renaming. Programs that you no longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.

For exchanging programs and data with other workstations, ShopTurn provides you with various options:

• Own hard disk (PCU 50.3 only) • CompactFlash card • Disk drive (PCU 50.3 only) • USB network connection

The following sections explain the program management of ShopTurn on either the NCU (HMI Embedded sl) or the PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced). Please find out which version of ShopTurn you are running and then read the section titled either "Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)" or "Managing programs with PCU 50.3".

11 01/2008 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11


11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

For the version of ShopTurn on the NCU (HMI Embedded sl), all the programs and data are always kept in the NCK work memory. In addition, the directory management of a USB/network drive can be displayed.

ShopTurn user interface on NCU (HMI Embedded)

NC main memory

editedit

USB/Network drive

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs


Data storage with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

Program manager for ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can allow you to display the directories and programs of USB/network drives and the CF-card

11 Program management 01/2008 11.2 Managing programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded sl)

11


drive. The "USB Front" softkey is preset to the default.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:

Directory

Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and executing a program in: References: /BEMsl/, Operating Manual HMI Embedded sl.

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for memory space management in the NCK.

Opening the directory

-or-

Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.


...

Select the storage medium using the softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.


11


-or-



Returning to the next highest directory level

Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.2.1 Opening a program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the machining plan for the program.



Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-




11


11.2.2 Executing a program

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around, you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that you change the preceding symbol of the position data.


Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute


ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece").

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.


11


11.2.3 Executing a G code program from USB/network drive

If the capacity of your NCK work memory is already close to being exhausted, you also have the option of executing G code programs from the network drive. In this way, instead of the entire G code program being loaded into the NCK memory, only the first part of it is loaded. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

The G code program remains stored on the network drive while the drive is being used for executing it.

Sequence programs cannot be executed from the network drive.


…

Select the network drive using the softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-


The directory opens.

Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue

> Exec. from

hard disk

Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G code program.

Cycle Start


The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece"). The program contents are continuously reloaded into the NCK work memory as the machining progresses.


11


11.2.4 Creating a new directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this purpose in a directory. You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work memory.

Creating a directory


New

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

Enter a new directory name.


The new directory is created.

Creating a program


Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-


New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurn

program

Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a sequential control program. (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")

-or-

G code

program Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a G

code program. (see Sec. "G code program")


11


11.2.5 Selecting several programs

You can select several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several

programs as a block


Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Mark


-or-

Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several programs individually



Press the "Select" key.

-or-

Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.


11


11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory/program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. You can also copy and paste directories and programs to and from other locations in order to exchange data with other ShopTurn systems via the network drive. You can also rename directories or programs.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a

directory/program


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy


Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert


The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.

Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the directory/program.

-or-

Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory under another name.

-and-



11


Renaming a directory/program


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename


In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name. The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.


The directory/program is renamed.

11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program

From time to time, delete the programs or directories that you are no longer using in order to keep your data manageable and to free up the NCK work memory again. Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g. USB flash drive) or via a USB/network drive.

Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as persistent memory media.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Delete

Press the "Delete" and "OK" softkeys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.


11


11.2.8 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data

Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point settings. You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn, SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point

You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system provides for loading/unloading of tool data into/out of the magazine (see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into the magazine").

Saving data


Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue

> Back up

data Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

Select the data you want to back up.

Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.


11



The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data


Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to re-import.

Execute

-or- Select the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key.

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.


The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as follows:

All tool offset data First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing

tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

-or-

Replace

none Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data

import.

-or-


11


Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Zero offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered in the tool list without a location number.

11 01/2008 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11


11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced) For the version of ShopTurn with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced), there is

also an individual hard disk in addition to the NCK work memory. This makes it possible to store all the programs that are not currently needed in the NCK on the hard-disk. In addition, the directory management of a disk drive, USB drive, or network drive can be displayed.

ShopTurn user interface PCU 50.3

NC main memory

edit

Data manage-ment on harddisk

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programsedit

edit

load

unload

saveDiskette drive

edit

Network drive



Data storage with PCU 50.3

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

Program manager PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can be used. You can

11 Program management 01/2008 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11


display the directories and programs of the following storage media: • USB/Network drives (network card required) • Diskette drive • Local USB front interface • The hard disk as archive directory.


In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the following meaning:

Directory

Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Loaded At a cross in the "Loaded" column, you will see whether the program is still in the NCK work memory (X) or whether it is on the hard-disk ( ).

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and executing a program in: References: /BAD/, Operating Manual HMI Advanced

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for memory space management on the hard-disk and in the NCK.


11


Opening the directory

-or-

Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.


Select the storage medium using the softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

-or-



Returning to the next highest directory level

Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.3.1 Opening a program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the machining plan for the program.



Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-




11


11.3.2 Executing a program

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around, you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that you change the preceding symbol of the position data.



Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute


ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece").

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.


11


11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program

If you do not want to execute one or more programs in the immediate future, you can unload them from the NCK work memory. The programs are then stored on the hard-disk and the NCK work memory is freed up.

As soon as you execute a program that was stored on the hard-disk,

it is automatically reloaded into the NCK work memory. However, you can load one or more sequential control programs into the NCK work memory without have to immediately execute them.

Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from the NCK work memory to the hard-disk.

Unloading a program


Position the cursor on the program that you would like to unload from the NCK work memory.

Continue

> Manual

unload Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" softkeys.

The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column. In the line that displays the available memory space, you will see that the NCK work memory was freed up.

Loading a program


Position the cursor on the program that you would like to load into the NCK work memory.

Continue

> Manual

load Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" softkeys.

The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column.


11


11.3.4 Executing a G code program from a hard disk or floppy disk/network drive

If the capacity of your NCK main memory is already stretched, you can also execute G code programs from the hard disk or a floppy disk or network drive. The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

The G code program remains stored on the hard disk or floppy disk/network drive when executed from there.

You cannot execute sequence programs from hard disk or floppy disk/network drive.

Running a G code

program from the hard disk


Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk.

-or-



Place the cursor on the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk (without "X").

Continue

> Exec. from

hard disk



Cycle Start




11


Running a G code program from floppy disk or network drive


...

Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-


The directory opens.

Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue

> Exec. from

hard disk



Cycle Start




11


11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this purpose in a directory. You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work memory.

Creating a directory


New

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

Enter a new directory name.


The new directory is created.

Creating a program


Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-


New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurn

program

Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a sequential control program. (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")

-or-

G code

program Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a

G code program. (see Sec. "Programming G code")


11


11.3.6 Selecting several programs

You can select several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several

programs as a block



Mark


-or-

Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several programs individually



Press the "Select" key.

-or-

Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.


11


11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory/program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. You can also move directories or programs or rename them. You can also use the copy, cut and insert capabilities for directories and programs to exchange data with other ShopTurn systems via diskette or the network drive.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a

directory/program


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy


Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert


The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.


-or-


-and-



11


Renaming a directory/program


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename


In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name. The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.


The directory/program is renamed.

Moving a directory/program


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey and then the "OK" softkey.

The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in buffer memory.

Select the directory level in which you want to insert the directory/program.

Insert


The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directorylevel, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.


-or-


-and-



11


11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longerusing to maintain a clearer overview of your data management. Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g. USB FlashDrive) or on a USB/network drive.

Please note that USB FlashDrives are not suitable for use as persistent memory media.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.


Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Cut

Press the "Cut" and "OK" softkeys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.

11.3.9 Saving/reading in tool/zero point data

In addition to the programs, you can also save/read-in tool data and zero-point settings. You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBTsl/, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn, SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point


11


You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system provides for loading/unloading of tool data into or out of the magazine (see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into the magazine").

Saving data


Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue

> Back up

data Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

Select the data you want to back up.

Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.


The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data


Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to re-import.

Execute

-or-

-or-

Press the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key or "Cursor right".

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.


11



The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as follows:

All tool offset data First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing

tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

-or-

Replace

none Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data

import.

-or-

Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Zero offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered in the tool list without a location number.

12 01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data 12


Messages, alarms, user data 12.1 Messages.............................................................................................................. 12-416

12.2 Alarms ................................................................................................................... 12-416

12.3 User data............................................................................................................... 12-417

12.4 Version display...................................................................................................... 12-419

12 Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008 12.1 Messages

12


12.1 Messages ShopTurn displays messages in the dialogue line, which give you

operating information or inform you of the progress of the machining process. The appearing messages do not interrupt the machining.

Dialogue line with a message

12.2 Alarms If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm

and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion. The error text gives you more detailed information on the cause of the error.

Warning

If you do not heed an alarm that is issued and do not clear the cause of the alarm, it can present a hazard to the machine, the workpiece, the saved settings and, in certain circumstances, your health.

The various alarm numbers are assigned to the following sections:

61000-62999 Cycles 100000-100999 Basic system 101000-101999 Diagnostics 102000-102999 Services 103000-103999 Machine 104000-104999 Parameters 105000-105999 Programming 106000-106999 Reserved 107000-107999 OEM 110000-111999 Reserved 112000-112999 ShopTurn 120000-120999 Reserved

A description of all the alarms can be found in References: /DAsl/, Diagnostics Manual, SINUMERIK 840Dsl/840Di sl

12 01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data12.3 User data

12


Press the "Alarm list” softkey.

The list containing the active messages and alarms appears.

Carefully check the machine according to the description given in the alarm.

Clear the cause of the alarm.

Reset Cycle Start

Press the key that appears as a symbol next to the alarm if you want to delete the alarm.

-or-

Switch the machine or controller off and then on again if the symbol of the main switch (POWER ON) is displayed next to the alarm.

12.3 User data User data are variables that are used internally by both ShopTurn and

G-code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.

The following types of variables are defined:

• Global User Data (GUD) Global user data is valid in all programs. The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via keyswitch or password.

• Local User Data (LUD)

Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in which it was defined. During program execution, ShopTurn displays the LUDs that are present between the current block and the end of the program. If you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The values, however, are continuously updated.

• Global Program User Data (PUD) Global program user data is created from the local variables (LUD) defined in the main program. PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and written. The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.

12 Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008 12.3 User data

12


• Channel-specific user data Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.

ShopTurn does not display user data of the AXIS and FRAME type.

To learn which variables ShopTurn displays, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

Displaying user data

-or-

Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.


Press the "User data" softkey.

Global

user data ... Program

user data Activate one of the softkeys to choose the user data that you want

to display.

GUD +

or GUD -

You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD -" softkeys to display the

global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.

Searching user data

Search


Enter the text string that you want to locate. You can search for any character string.


The user data is displayed.

Continue


necessary.

The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

12 01/2008 Messages, alarms, user data12.4 Version display

12


12.4 Version display You can find the ShopTurn version in the start-up screen.

The ShopTurn and NCU version can also be seen on the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Displaying versions

Press the "Expansion” key in order to open the expanded basic menu bar.

Diagnosis

Service

displays Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" softkeys.

Version

NCU

version Press the "Version" and "NCU version" softkeys.

The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears: xx.yy.zz.nn.

12 Messages, alarms, user data 01/2008 12.4 Version display

12


Notes

13 01/2008 Examples 13


Examples 13.1 Standard machinings ............................................................................................ 13-422

13.2 Contour milling ...................................................................................................... 13-434

13 Examples 01/2008 13.1 Standard machinings

13


13.1 Standard machinings Workpiece drawing

4x∅5

∅90

23

∅32

X 5:18

4

15°15°

R1 R1

FS3

FS2R6

X 5

M48

x2

∅60

3x45°

1035

70

80

85

95

R23FS1 FS1

∅ 3

4

23

4°

R8

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅90 x 120 mm Material: Aluminum

Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6 Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4 Finishing tool 35°, R0.4 Recessing tool Plate width 4 Threading tool_2 Drill ∅5 Milling tool ∅8

13 01/2008 Examples13.1 Standard machinings

13


Program

1. Create a new program In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating

area, press the New

and ShopTurn

program softkeys.

Program name (here: Enter demo part_1)

Press the softkey.

2. Program header The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed. Define the blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 90 abs ZA 0 abs ZI -120 abs ZB -100 abs Retraction Simple XRA 2 inc ZRA 5 inc Tool change point MCS XT 160 abs ZT 409 abs SC 1 inc S1 4000 RPM Unit of measurem. mm

Press the softkey.

3. Stock removal cycle for facing Press the

Stock

removal softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Roughing tool_80 F 0.300 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining

Position

Direction Plan (parallel to the X axis) X0 60 abs Z0 2 abs X1 -1.6 abs Z1 0 abs D 2 inc UX 0 inc UZ 0.1 inc


13


Press the softkey.

4. Input of blank contour with contour computer Press the

New

contour softkeys.

Input contour name (here: Input Cont_1)

Press the softkey.

Determine the starting point of the contour:

X 60 abs Z 0 abs

Press the softkey.

Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by

pressing the softkey:

1. Z -40 abs

2. X 80 abs Z -45 abs

3. Z -65 abs

4. X 90 abs Z -70 abs

5. Z -95 abs

6. X 0 abs

7. Z 0 abs

8. X 60 abs Z 0 abs

Press the softkey.


13


Blank contour

5. Input of finished part contour with contour computer

Press the New

contour softkeys.

Input contour name (here: Input Cont_2)

Press the softkey.


X 0 abs Z 0 abs Enter the following contour elements and confirm each one by


1. X 48 abs FS 3

2. α2 90°

3. Direction of rotation R 23 abs X 60 abs K -35 abs.

I 80 abs Dialog

selection Accept

dialog FS 2

4. Z -80 abs R 6

5. X 90 abs Z -85 abs FS 3

6. Z -95 abs


13


Press the softkey.

Finished-part contour

6. Stock removal (roughing) Press the

Stock

removal softkeys.

Enter parameters:


Direction of stock

removal Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)

Machining side External Machining direction ← (from front to back) D 1.9 inc Cutting depth UX 0.2 inc UZ 0.1 inc BL Contour Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts No

Press the softkey.


13


Stock removal

7. Solid machine residual material Press the

St. remov.

resid. softkeys.

Enter parameters:


Direction of stock

removal Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)

Machining side External Machining direction ← (from front to back) D 2 inc Cutting depth UX 0.200 inc UZ 0.100 inc Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes FR 0.250 mm/rev

Press the softkey.

8. Stock removal (finishing) Press the

Stock

removal softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Finishing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min


13


Machining

Direction of stock removal

Longitudinal (parallel to the Z axis)

Machining side External Machining direction ← (from front to back) Stock allowance No Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes

Press the softkey.

9. Groove (roughing)

Press the Recess

softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining

Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs Z0 -70 B2 8 inc T1 4 inc α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 D 2 inc U 0.100 inc N 1

Press the softkey.


13


Recess

10. Groove (finishing)

Press the Recess

softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs Z0 -70 B1 5.856 inc. T1 4 inc α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 N 1

Press the softkey.

11. Longitudinal threads M48x2 (roughing) Press the

Thread

Thread

long. softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Threading tool_2


13


P 2 mm/rev G 0 S 400 RPM Cut segmentation Diminishing Machining method

Thread External thread X0 48 abs Z0 0 abs Z1 -25 abs W 4 inc R 4 inc K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed AS 10 U 0.020 inc V 1 inc Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey.

12. Longitudinal threads M48x2 (finishing) Press the

Thread

Thread

long. softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Threading tool_2 P 2 mm/rev G 0 S 400 RPM Machining method Thread External thread X0 48 abs Z0 0 abs Z1 -25 abs W 4 inc R 4 inc K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed V 1 inc Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey.


13


13. Drilling

Press the Drilling

reaming > Drilling

softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Drill F 200 mm/min S 1000 RPM Position Face Point/Shaft Tip Z1 10 inc DT 0 s

Press the softkey.

14. Positioning

Press the Positions

> softkeys.

Enter parameters:

Position Face Right-angle/Polar Polar Z0 0 abs C0 0 abs L0 16 abs C1 90 abs L1 16 abs C2 180 abs L2 16 abs C3 270 abs L3 16 abs

Press the softkey.

15. Mill a rectangular pocket

Press the Pocket

> Rectangu-

lar pocket softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool F 0.030 mm/tooth S 1800 RPM Position Face Machining method

Position Single position X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs W 23


13


L 23 R 8 α0 4 degrees Z1 5 inc DXY 50% DZ 3 UXY 0.1 mm UZ 0.1 Insertion Center FZ 50 mm/min

Press the softkey.

Result


Process plan


13


Simulation, volume model

13 Examples 01/2008 13.2 Contour milling

13


13.2 Contour milling Workpiece drawing

Ø120

R46

R50

R10

R14

R6

R10 40

80

T=5

T=3

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅120 x 80 mm

Material: Aluminum

Tools Milling tool: ∅18 Milling tool: ∅5 Program

1. Create a new program In the required directory of the "Program manager" operating area,

press the New

and ShopTurn

program softkeys.

Program name (here: input contour)

Press the softkey.

2. Fill out the program head The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed. Define the blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 120 abs ZA 0 abs ZI -80 abs

13 01/2008 Examples13.2 Contour milling

13


ZB -50 abs Retraction Simple XRA 125 abs ZRA 2 abs Tool change point WCS XT 200 abs ZT 200 abs SC 1 inc S1 1000 RPM Unit of measurem. mm

Press the softkey.

3. Input the limiting contour

Press the Contour

milling New

contour softkeys.

Input contour name (here: Contour_1)

Press the softkey.


Position Face X 0 abs Y -61 abs

Press the softkey.



1. Direction of rotation

R 61 abs Y -61 abs I 0 abs.

Dialog

selection Accept

dialog


13


Limiting contour

Press the softkey.

4. Input exterior contour

Press the Contour

milling New

contour softkeys.


Press the softkey.


Position Face X 0 abs Y 50 abs

Press the softkey.



1. Direct. of rot. R 50 abs X 0 abs Y -50 abs

2. Tangent to

prec. elem. Direct. of rot.


13


R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

3. Tangent to

prec. elem. Direct. of rot. R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

4. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

5. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

6. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

Outside contour


13


Press the softkey.

5. Ream outside contour

Press the Contour

milling Remove

softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool_18 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 200 m/min Position Face Machining

Z0 0 abs Z1 5 inc DXY 50% DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Starting point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey.

6. Input inside contour

Press the Contour

milling New

contour softkeys.


Press the softkey.


Machining plane Face X 0 abs Y 46 abs

Press the softkey.



1. Direct. of rot. R 46 abs X 0 abs Y -46 abs


13


2. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

3. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

4. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

5. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog

6. Tangent to


Dialog

selection Accept

dialog


13


Inside contour

Press the softkey.

7. Ream inside contour

Press the Contour

milling Remove

softkeys.

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool_5 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 250 m/min Position Face Machining

Z0 0 abs Z1 3 inc DXY 100% DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Starting point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey.


13


Result


Process plan


13


Notes

A 01/2008 Appendix A

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-443

Appendix A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-444

B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-447

A Appendix 01/2008 A Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. A-444 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

A Abbreviations ABS Absolute dimensions

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication: Component of NC control that performs and coordinates communication.

D Cutting edge

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)

DRF Differential Resolver Function: The function in conjunction with an electronic handwheel generates an incremental work offset in automatic mode.

DRY Dry Run: Dry run feedrate

F Feedrate

GUD Global User Data

INC Increment

INC Incremental dimensions

INI Initializing Data

LEDs Light-Emitting Diode

M01 M function: Programmed stop

MCS Machine Coordinate System

MD Machine data

MDA Manual Data Input

MPF Main Program File

NC Numerical Control: The NC control comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and COM.

A 01/2008 AppendixA Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 A-445

NCK Numerical Control Kernel: A component of the NC control that processes the programs and essentially coordinates the movement processes for the tool machine.

OP Operator Panel

PC Personal Computer

PCU Personal Computer Unit: Component of NC control allowing communication between operator and machine.

PLC Programmable Logic Control: Component of NC control for processing machine tool control logic

PRT Program test

REF Approaching a reference point

REPOS Reposition

ROV Rapid override

S Spindle speed

SBL Single Block

SI Safety Integrated

SKP SKiP: Skip block

SPF Sub Program File

SW Software

T Tool

TMZ Tool Magazine Zero

V Cutting rate

WCS Workpiece coordinate system

WO Work offset

WPD Workpiece Directory

A Appendix 01/2008 A Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. A-446 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Notes

I 01/2008 AppendixIndex

I

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008 I-447

B Index

3 3D probe, 2-59 3-window view, 3-117 A Abort program, 3-92 ABS, 4-128 Absolute dimensions, 4-128 Accepting parameters, 1-41 Access authorization, 1-28 Activate, 7-351 Additional command, 5-210, 5-212, 5-276 Adjustment, 4-133 Alarms, 12-416 Alignment angle, 8-354, 8-356 Angular offset, 5-203 Annular slot, 5-250 Append contour element, 5-216, 5-282 Approach, 4-126 Approach cycle, 5-326 Approach mode, 5-285 Approach strategy, 5-285 Arithmetic variables, 7-352 Automatic mode, 2-50 Auxiliary function, 3-106 Axes

Positioning, 2-81 Repositioning, 3-95 Traversing, 2-79

Axis key, 1-26 B B axis, 8-354

Approach/retraction, 8-358 Measuring a tool, 8-361 Milling, 8-356 Position pattern, 8-360 Swiveling, 8-357 Tool selection in manual mode, 8-362

Basic block display, 3-94 Blank, 4-136 Blank shape

Changing, 3-112 Block search, 3-96 Box, 5-182 Broken-line graphics, 1-37 Button, 2-59

C C1, 0-7 C3, 0-7 Calculation variants, 3-96 Cancelling machining, 3-92 Centering, 5-167, 5-289 Change parameter, 1-41 Changing dialog selection, 5-217, 5-283 Changing program settings, 5-322 Channel operational messages, 1-30 Channel status, 1-30 Chipbreaking, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171 Circle

Known center point, 5-156 Known radius, 5-157 Polar, 5-162

Circular pocket, 5-236 Circular spigot, 5-244 Circumferential slot, 5-250 Clamping a spindle

Contour milling, 5-270 Drilling, 5-163 Milling, 5-231

Close contour, 5-214, 5-278 CNC ISO user interface, 1-42 Collet dimensions, 2-52 Complete, 5-316 Complete machining, 4-143 Concatenation, 4-122 Contour, 0-7

Changing, 5-216, 5-282 Copying, 4-146 Creating, 5-210, 5-273 Exact machining, 5-212 Renaming, 4-147 Representation, 5-208, 5-271 Rounding, 5-220 Start point, 5-210

Contour beginning, 5-210, 5-273 Contour calculator, 5-206, 5-268 Contour element

Creating, 5-211, 5-275 Contour end

Transition element, 5-212 Contour milling, 5-268

I Appendix 01/2008 Index

I

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. I-448 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BATsl) - 01/2008

Contour pocket Centering, 5-289 Chamfering, 5-302 Finishing, 5-298 Milling, 5-293 Predrilling, 5-289 Residual material, 5-296 Roughing, 5-293

Contour spigot, 5-270 Chamfering, 5-311 Finishing, 5-308 Milling, 5-303 Residual material, 5-306 Roughing, 5-303

Contour transition element, 5-211, 5-276 Contour

Island, 5-268 Pocket, 5-268

Coolant, 2-63 Coordinate system, 1-21 Coordinate transformation, 2-71

Defining, 5-324 Count, 10-384 Counterspindle, 4-142 Counterspindle

Angular offset, 5-319 Machining, 5-316 Park position, 5-319 Settings, 2-52

Cut segmentation, 5-220 Cutting depth, 5-219 Cutting edge, 4-141 Cutting edge position

Changing, 2-60 Cutting rate, 4-142 Cycle, 0-7 Cycle approach, 4-126 Cycle support, 7-344 D D, 4-141 Deep hole drilling, 5-169 Delete contour element, 5-218, 5-284 Deleting machining lines, 3-118 Dialog line, 1-29 Directory

Copying, 11-396, 11-410 Creating, 11-394, 11-408

Deleting, 11-397, 11-412 Moving, 11-411 Opening, 11-390, 11-403 Renaming, 11-397, 11-411 Selecting, 11-390

Disable magazine location, 10-386 DP, 2-60 Drawer, 5-204 DRF offset, 3-102 Drill, 2-58 Drilling, 5-167

Centered, 5-164 Deep, 5-169 Manual Machine, 6-340

DRY run feedrate, 3-110 Duplo number, 10-377 E EMERGENCY OFF, 1-25 Enable magazine location, 10-386 End, 7-351 End face, 4-125 End of contour, 5-210, 5-273 End of program, 4-123, 4-136, 4-148 Engraving, 5-261 Entering parameters, 1-40 Equidistant, 2-55 External thread, 5-173 F F, 4-142 Face, 4-125 Face milling, 5-303 Face view, 3-115 Face Y, 4-125 Feed interruption, 5-220 Feedrate, 4-142 Feedrate override, 1-27 Feedrate status, 1-30 Finding an empty location, 10-380, 10-382 Finishing, 4-143 Finishing tool, 2-57 Front, 5-316 Front C, 4-125 Front edge, 2-52 Full circle, 5-184 Function group, 4-140


I


G G code

Copying, 7-350 Cutting, 7-350 Finding, 7-350 Into sequence program, 5-328 Pasting, 7-350 Selecting, 7-349 Skipping, 3-102

G code block, 5-329 Renumber, 7-351

G code editor, 7-349 G code program

Executing, 7-347, 11-393, 11-406 G function, 3-106 Gearing step, 2-78 Grinding allowance, 5-215, 5-216 Gripping, 5-316 Grooving, 5-224

Residual material, 5-226 H H function, 3-106 Hard disk, 11-406 Help screen, 1-39 I Idle cuts

Manual Machine, 6-340 INC, 4-129 Inch, 2-50 Inclined axis, 4-124 Increment, 2-80 Incremental dimension, 4-129 Incremental dimensions, 4-129 Input field, 1-40 Insert a contour element, 5-217, 5-283 Insert mode, 1-41 Inside contour, 5-276 Internal thread, 5-173 K Key-operated switch, 1-28 Keys

Operation, 1-32 L Line, 5-178 Longitudinal slot, 5-247 Lowercase letters, 5-263

M M function, 2-84, 3-106 M01, 3-101 Machine control panels, 1-25 Machine coordinate system, 2-51 Machine run times, 2-87 Machine zero, 1-21 Machining, 4-143

Simulating, 3-107 Simultaneous recording, 3-107

Machining direction, 5-322 Machining feedrate, 4-142 Machining lines, 3-108 Machining method, 4-143 Machining plane, 4-124 Magazine

Positioning, 10-383 Magazine list, 10-373 Magnifying glass, 2-69, 3-118 Main program, 5-313 Main spindle, 4-142

Settings, 2-52 Manual Data Input, 2-86 Manual Machine

Drilling, 6-340 Milling, 6-341 Simulation, 6-342 Traversing movements, 6-336 Turning, 6-340 Zero offsets, 6-335

Manual mode, 2-49, 2-77 M function, 2-84 Positioning axes, 2-81 Spindle, 2-78 Stock removal, 2-81 Tool, 2-77 Traversing axes, 2-79 Unit of measurement, 2-85 Work offset, 2-84

Marker, 5-315 Matrix, 5-179 MCS, 2-51 MDA, 2-49, 2-86 Measuring

Tool, 2-63, 2-65 Workpiece zero, 2-70

Measuring cycle support, 7-344


I


Messages, 12-416 Millimeters, 2-50 Milling

Manual Machine, 6-341 Milling tool, 2-58 Mirror writing, 5-262 Mirroring, 5-325 Modifying contour element, 5-217, 5-282 Multifix tool holder

Manual Machine, 10-371 Multiple edge, 5-259 N Network drive, 11-393, 11-406 New contour

Milling, 5-273 Turning, 5-210

New tool, 2-56, 10-374 Number of workpieces, 4-148 O Offset, 5-324 Online help, 7-344 Operation, 1-32 Operator panel OP 010, 1-22 Origin, 3-118 Outside contour, 5-276 P Parameter

Calculating, 1-41 Parameterization screen form, 1-38 Parameters

Deleting, 1-41 Parting, 5-204 Password, 0-4, 1-28 Path milling, 5-284 Peripheral, 4-125 Peripheral surface, 4-125 Peripheral surface C, 4-125 Peripheral Y, 4-126 Pitch circle, 5-186 Plunge cutting, 5-254 Plunge-turning, 5-227

Residual material, 5-229 Plunging, 5-254 Pocket

Circular, 5-236 Rectangular, 5-232

Pole, 4-130, 5-159

Position Freely programmable, 5-176 Repeating, 5-189

Position pattern Box, 5-182 Full circle, 5-184 Line, 5-178 Matrix, 5-179 Pitch circle, 5-186

Positioning block, 4-123 POWER ON, 12-417 Predrilling, 5-289 Pre-warning limit, 10-384 Probe

Calibrating, 2-67 Process plan, 1-37 Processing time, 3-108 Program, 0-6

Copying, 11-396, 11-410 Correcting, 3-105 Creating, 4-136, 11-394, 11-408 Deleting, 11-397, 11-412 Executing, 11-392, 11-404 from another machine, 11-392, 11-404 Load, 11-405 Moving, 11-411 Opening, 11-391, 11-403 Overstoring, 3-103 Renaming, 11-397, 11-411 Running in, 3-93 Select, 3-90 Selecting several, 11-395, 11-409 Starting, 3-92 Testing, 3-104 Unload, 11-405

Program block, 4-122 Chained, 4-122 Changing, 4-144 Copying, 4-146 Creating, 4-140 Cutting, 4-146 Displaying, 3-94 Number, 4-147 Pasting, 4-146 Repeating, 5-315 Searching for, 4-147 Selecting, 4-146


I


Program control, 1-30 Test run feed rate, 3-119

Program editor, 4-145 Program header, 4-122, 4-136 Program management

PCU 50.3, 11-401 ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded, 11-389

Program manager, 11-389, 11-401 Program structure, 4-122 Programmed stop, 3-101 Programming

with two tool holders, 9-364 Programming graphics, 1-37 Protection levels, 1-28 Pulling, 5-316 Q Quantity, 4-148 R R variables, 7-352 Radius compensation, 4-141 Rapid traverse override, 1-27 Reading in tool data, 11-398, 11-412 Reading in zero point data, 11-398, 11-412 Reaming, 5-167 Rear, 5-316 Recess, 5-193 Recessing tool, 2-58 Recompile, 7-345, 7-346 Rectangular pocket, 5-232 Rectangular spigot, 5-240 Reference point, 2-46 Remote Diagnostics, 1-42 Repeating, 5-315 Replacement tool, 10-377 Repos, 3-95 Repositioning, 3-95 Reset, 1-25 Residual material

Contour pocket, 5-296 Contour spigot, 5-306 Grooving, 5-226 Plunge-turning, 5-229 Stock removal, 5-222

Retract, 4-126 Retract mode, 5-285 Retract strategy, 5-285 Retraction, 4-137, 5-322

Retraction cycle, 5-326 Reworking threads

Manual Machine, 6-341 Rotary drill, 2-56, 2-59, 10-374 Rotation, 5-324 Rotation C, 5-325 Roughing, 4-143 Roughing tool, 2-57 S S, 4-142 S1, 0-7, 1-29 S2, 0-7, 1-29 S3, 0-7, 1-29 Safety distance, 4-139 Safety Integrated, 2-48 Saving tool data, 11-398, 11-412 Saving zero point data, 11-398, 11-412 Scale, 2-76 Scaling, 5-325 Screw tap, 2-59 Search

Block, 3-98 Text, 3-100

Secondary mode, 1-30 Selecting a dialog, 5-212, 5-277 Selecting parameters, 1-40 Selecting the unit, 1-41 Sequence program, 4-134 Set machining area limits, 5-220 Settings

Automatic mode, 3-119 Changing, 5-322 Manual mode, 2-84

ShopTurn Open, 1-44 Side view, 3-114 Simulation, 3-109, 7-347

Manual Machine, 6-342 Simultaneous recording

During machining, 3-111 Prior to machining, 3-110

Single Block, 3-93 Skip, 3-102 Slot

Circumferential, 5-250 Longitudinal, 5-247

Slot side compensation, 5-286


I


Softkey Abort, 1-35 Accept, 1-35 Back, 1-35 CNC ISO, 1-42 OK, 1-35 Overview, 4-134

Softkeys Operation, 1-32

Special axis, 0-7 Special characters, 5-263 Speed limits, 4-139 Spigot

Circular, 5-244 Rectangular, 5-240

Spindle override, 1-27 Spindle speed, 4-142 Spindle status, 1-30 Stock removal, 5-164, 5-166, 5-169, 5-171, 5-190,

5-218 Manual mode, 2-81 Residual material, 5-222

Stop, 2-59 Stop edge, 2-52 Straight

Manual Machine, 6-338 Polar, 5-160

Straight line, 5-154 Switching off, 2-46 Switching on, 2-46 Synchronization point, 5-203 T T, 4-141 Tailstock, 4-138 Tangent, 5-212, 5-277 Taper

Manual Machine, 6-337 Tapping, 5-171 Teach tool change point, 4-140 Teaching, 5-330

Contour object, 5-332 Cycle, 5-330 Position pattern, 5-331

Teaching a contour object, 5-332 Teaching a cycle, 5-330 Teaching a position pattern, 5-331 Technology block, 4-123

TEMP, 11-397, 11-412 Thread

Centered, 5-166 Cutting, 5-199 Milling, 5-173 Multiple, 5-202 Re-machining, 5-203

Thread undercut, 5-197 Threading tool, 2-58 Tolerance class, 4-133 Tolerance quality, 4-133 Tool, 4-141

Changing a name, 10-375 Creating, 2-56, 10-374 Delete, 10-378 Loading, 10-379 Measuring, 2-63, 2-65 Multiple cutting edges, 10-376 Relocating, 10-381 Sorting, 10-378 Unloading, 10-380

Tool alignment, 8-356 Tool change point, 4-138 Tool holder

Two, 9-364 Tool length compensation, 2-54 Tool life, 10-384 Tool list, 2-60, 10-368 Tool magazine, 10-373 Tool monitoring, 10-384 Tool name, 2-57 Tool nose radius compensation, 2-55 Tool offset data, 2-54, 10-369 Tool radius compensation, 2-55 Tool spindle, 4-142 Tool type, 2-60 Tool wear data, 10-383 Tool wear list, 10-372 Tool-specific specifications, 10-370 Total offset, 2-71 Trochoidal milling, 5-253 Turning, 4-125

Manual Machine, 6-340 Turning machines

with B axis, 8-354 Turning out a collet, 2-81


I


Turning tool with two tool holders, 9-364

U Undercut

Form E, 5-196 Form F, 5-196 Thread, 5-197

Unit of measurement, 2-50, 4-136 USB drive, 11-393, 11-406 User agreement, 2-48 User data, 12-417 User interface, 1-29 V V, 4-142 Variables, 12-417 Version display, 12-419 Volume model, 3-116 Vortex milling, 5-253 W WCS, 2-51

Wear, 10-384 Work offset list, 2-75 Workpiece coordinate system, 2-51 Workpiece counter

G code programs, 3-120 Workpiece zero, 1-21

Measuring, 2-70 Workpieces, Number of, 4-148 Z Z3, 0-7 Zero offset, 2-71

Basic, 2-71 Coordinate transformation, 2-71 Defining, 2-74 Setting, 2-72 Total, 2-71

Zero offsets Calling, 5-323 Manual Machine, 6-335

Zoom, 3-118


I


Notes

To SIEMENS AG

Suggestions Corrections

A&D MC MS1 Postfach 3180 91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline] Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 63315 [Documentation] mailto:[email protected]

For Publication/Manual:

SINUMERIK 840D sl ShopTurn

User Documentation

From Name Address of your Company/Dept.

Address:

Zip code City:

Phone: /

Fax: /

Operation/Programming Order No.: 6FC5398-5AP10-2BA0

01/2008 Edition Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvements are also welcome.

Suggestions and/or corrections


Overview

08 Programming ShopTurn

Documents

new documentation

control sinumerik

new control

new status

d slshopturn

shopturn program

2ba0 siemens ag

shopturn functions